Home

HiPath Cordless IP - Experts Wiki

1. aaa 267 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 9 Introduction Scope 1 Introduction 1 1 Scope This document describes all different kinds of the HiPath Cordless IP System e HPCIP Small Solution e HPCIP Server Solution e HPCIP Large Solution 1 1 1 HPCIP Solution Overview Solution Type No of No of Description BSIP1 HCIP Server Small Solution 1 10 n a System components One to 10 pieces of base stations BSIP1 Operation modes One base station BSIP1 running in BSIP IWU mode All others base stations BSIP1 running in BSIP only mode Server Solution 1 60 1 System components One to 60 pieces of base stations BSIP1 One HiPath Cordless IP Server HCIP Server Operation modes One HiPath Cordless IP Server HCIP Server running in HCIP Server mode Management Server mode Media Server mode All base stations BSIP1 running in BSIP only mode Large Solution 1 3000 2 100 System components One to 3000 pieces of base stations BSIP1 Two to 100 HiPath Cordless IP Server HCIP Server Operation modes One HiPath Cordless IP Server running in HCIP Management Server mode One to 100 HiPath Cordless IP Server running in HCIP Media Server mode All base stations BSIP1 running in BSIP only mode A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 10 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documenta
2. LAL No of No ofRPN RPN belonging to a Local Area 1 bits Loc per Loc Areas Area 39 2 254 1 01 02 03 further 248 location areas FD FE FF 38 128 2 1 01 02 03 04 05 further 118 location areas FA FB FC FD FE FF 37 64 4 3 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 further 58 location areas F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 36 32 8 7 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C OD OE OF further 28 location areas FQ F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 35 16 16 15 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C OD OE OF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F further 12 location areas E0 E1 E2 E3 EA E5 E6 E7 EB E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 34 8 32 31 01 02 03 04 05 06 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3bE 3F further 4 location areas C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF EO E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 33 4 64 63 01 02 03 04 05 06 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 242 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Dect Fundamentals LAL No of No ofRPN RPN belonging to a Local Area 1 bits
3. lille nh 217 512 Call Forward GP iz coe ster caret nts a Maren hee tea ene bah eens SCR Aa GAE GRE re Aan a 218 5 12 1 Technical Background Information 0 2 0 cette 219 5 13 Gall Gompletiorr GC usi ice bowls a ed Huta Ok eee ORTOS ewe wed Merah ele ee 220 5 13 1 Feature description 0 0 cents 220 5 13 2 WBM configuration 0 0 ren erer EEA NE tenet eee 220 5 13 3 Call description lt 060 000 cere Lee te kom kom e RE dad e ed dor eee ee 220 5 14 EDAPPhonebook 2 og t Che eee Bae ee A hs Ck SR Ae Se 222 5 141 Generalis casos lang eRe eke eee wea ei eer Ede E EIER 222 5 14 2 Configuration of LDAP Server 1 0 0 0 00 cc teens 222 5 14 2 1 Adding a new LDAP Server 20 cece tte eee eee 223 5 14 2 2 Assigning a LDAP Map File 0 0 6 eee eae 223 5 14 2 3 Assigning a LDAP Server to a Group 2 2 0 00 teens 223 5 14 3 EDAP Map Files rete ace le Girt ate EUN Ra eek y ab heen Samar EU Le Rar e d del A ANE oe eee 223 5 14 4 Sample LDAP Configuration File lsisseeseeelee Re 224 5 14 4 1 Built in LDAP server of OpenScapeOffice OSO MX 0000 e eee eee 224 5 14 4 2 Sample for Windows Directory service lille ees 226 5145 LDAP informatioli ze tie eg RE Ee Deme e DRIN EOD eek Ua RR E RE Ie e E be e RFT eS 226 5 14 6 Using the LDAP Phonebook lseeeeeeeee e hu rn 227 5 14 6 4 Wildcard search uL REDE REVUE ERU CERE ME EET E 227 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014
4. iissesseeeeeee teens 11 1 2 Terminology i eerie hate Re ex Ren Kc ene Ree c CR e ee Vrbs d aab CRI ee eR 11 la Network Concept uae rebua dore WES etek Heed owas eel bte iv veter uiri 12 1 3 1 Overview of Reserved Networks 0 0c cece ehh 13 1 3 2 Requirements 22 bL er US CE D Sle aiy Ea yeas hed DER wha ERA CER DAN RE OPERE xd 13 1 4 Synchronization Over Air Concept 1 2 0 0 00 ccc hrs 15 1 5 Synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 liiis 17 1 6 WBM related ISSUCS sie i se sia Ga RDR E E b eRCOL UE b EF R UE enna S UETODeSehigrbbEATAO rYs 18 1 6 1 Supported Web Browser iisselesseleeeee eh mere 18 1 6 2 General WBM 1SSUGS Sx m eher kin th eR bod UNE e Nobis IO aoe aie ME TUA TP MERE A 18 1 6 3 Simultaneous WBM Sessions 00 a a a E ehh 18 1 6 4 Marking Changed Values 0 0 00 c ct eee eee 19 1 6 5 Tooltips for Column Headers of Tables 0 0 ccc eee eee 19 1 6 6 Sorting of L ableS c ois te Tte te cler ore epe tl rte Pure pce e oe tet x Ale Pasa ace ek 20 1 6 7 Drag and Drop SUPPOM zu ene oboe ed Rede E ERI Peirus PRs hee RES Re rta Pix 20 1 6 8 Configuration Changes according Service State liliis 21 1 7 Partition concept of BSPT resi omnee uou RE PIRE E EROGO EUER Tar RES 22 1 8 Eactory resetot BSIP Tos ars aeter rrt thee dente t en tek chiede e aactor tae ete marine 23 2 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes 20020 cece e eee eee 25
5. Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration VPN enable This option enables the encryption of data communication signaling and voice data between the Media Gateway Local and all BSIP Only Encryption is realized by using an IPsec connection in transport mode using static keys Hint Some system relevant functions e g SCAN and SYNC are transmitted unencrypted VLAN Id The corresponding VLAN Id according IEEE 802 1q for the DECT network is configured here Important note Regardless of the value configured here the BSIP Only is not able to handle tagged Ethernet packets This is due to the fact that a BSIP Only has no local console access as compared to a standard cable based SIP phone and therefore may not be accessible anymore if VLAN is not configured correctly For this reason the Switchport at which a BSIP Only is attached to has to be configured untagged and assigned the VLAN Id configured here This does not apply to a BSIP IWU or a Server IWU The BSIP IWU and Server IWU are able to handle tagged Ethernet packets All Ethernet frames towards the VoIP Infrastructure network between the IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN Id if unequal 0 configured for the Infrastructure network option VLAN Id at page Network Gateways All Ethernet frames towards the DECT network between the IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN Id configured for the DE
6. DECT Call on MGW only for MGW IWU This field displays the number of the MGW the current last call was active on If a handset is switched off detached the value will be set to O A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 163 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 164 During start of system services after a call interruption or if a handset is switched off detached the value will be set to 0 If a handset initiates a handover the number of the new MGW will be displayed DECT Call on BS This field displays the number of the Base Station the current last call was active on VOIP IP This field displays the current IP address of the SIP server which was used for the last SIP message of the user Voip states This field displays the Voip state of the User No ras Ras up Ras down Call states This field displays the current Call state of the User Located on No location Calling out Alerting out Connected out Calling in Alerting in Connected in Switched off Removed Located off e fthe handset has located successfully to the HPCIP System and there is no active call or call request the IWU will signal Located on For an incoming call request from SIP The handset will be paged during the page process the IWU will display Calling in If the handset confirmed the page process successfully and has established
7. Hint If a syslog server is configured and enabled Start syslog OS specific messages are always logged to syslog independent from the chosen destination Logfile or syslog Syslog Server IP The IP address of the syslog server to which syslog output will be sent is confi gured here Logfile Size Total Displays the limit of the the maximum allocated disk space in bytes for all log files stored in the Log Path here A process checks periodically if the total size is reached If the limit is reached the oldest Log Files are deleted to free up disk space Logfile Size Displays the limit of the the maximum file size in bytes of a single Logfile here As soon as this size is reached the log output is continued in a new file Validation details Using this dropdown the output of Warnings may be reduced This is especially useful for a high number of Warnings in large systems where all output of Warnings will prevent the output of the more important Error output since the number of list entries in the Validation windows is limited A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Debugging Configuration IWU Possible Values range from No for no warning output to 4 for full warning output Hint The selection level is only applied to output of type WARNING and has no influence to the output of type ERROR LogPath All Displays the LogPath the files
8. Loc per Loc Areas Area 32 2 128 127 01 02 03 04 05 06 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF 1 0 is not supported as RPN for a Class B Dect network 2 Default value for HPCIP V1R4 5 28 2 Requirements for Roaming A DECT Roaming between two MGWs is functional resp is signaled by the handset only if the following requirements are met the old and new base station are NOT located inside the same Roaming Segment Physical Roaming e the complete ARI resp the FPS of both bases are located inside the same range defined by the PLI Since a fixed PLI of 31 is used the ARI has to be the same on both MGW e the DECT user is assigned to a group who has the ability to roam to the new MGW Group MediaGW List 5 28 3 Requirements for Handover A DECT Handover between two MGWs is functional resp is signaled by the handset only if the following requirements are met e achange of the Roaming Area is taking place Modulo problem both MGW are located in the same ARI 5 28 3 1 Modulo Problem This problem is also known in the context of HiPath SLC devices The SLC devices use a LAL of 35 therefore 16 RPN belong to one specific location area If an external handover between two bases attached to different SLC should be established a change of the location area has to be taken place This is only possible if the destined bases station is located in another
9. The following figure depicts the relationships between Gateways Groups and Users in the traditional concept of HPCIP up to V1R4 User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7 User 8 User 10 User 11 User 12 User 13 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 J Y EV Y PBX 1 PBX2 PBX3 According to the figure above the following relations exist A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes User Roaming e Several users may be assigned to one Group n 1 e Several groups may be assigned to one PBX n 1 2 3 2 New Concept The new concept of V1R5 introduces a new entity of type Media Gateway MGW in the group systematic A group is assigned to one or several Media Gateways In case of a BSIP IWU or Server IWU the groups can only be assigned to the MGW Local AMGW may be assigned one PBX on a per group base Therefore a MGW may be assigned several PBX by using several groups The following figure depicts the relationships between Gateways Groups and Users of HPCIP in V1R5 User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7 User 8 User 9 Group 1 Group 2 Group 4 Y he an MGW1 MGW1 MGW2 MGW1 MGW2 PBX 1 PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 4 PBX
10. Base Status Index Module Nu Name Online Sync Calls MoSync TsSync CaSync Ts1TxBc CalTxBe Ts2TxBc Ca2TxBc Online last Offline last 1 9 CL 1 2 YES N A 0 11 04 2014 15 06 N A 3 1 Bslp 1 001 YES NA 0 0 9 8 8 11 04 2014 15 06 N A 4 2 Bslp 1 002 YES YES 2 11 5 11 04 2014 15 06 N A The columns of the table have the following meaning Index This field contains the absolute resp global index number of the DECT module This number identifies a module on a specific IWU globally and independent from the assigned MGW The number is assigned by the IWU and cannot be changed A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 173 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 174 Module Number MGW This field contains the relative index number of the DECT module BSIP at a specific MGW The number may be changed manually Name Displays the name of the Base Station Online Yes if the selected Base Station is in state Online No if the selected Base Station is in state Offline Hint A Base station is only functional if its state is online Therefore the BSIP has to be synced running the same firmware version on the same partition as the IWU and Ethernet and ip communication between the Server and the BSIP is established Sync Yes if the selected Base Station is in Sync synchronized which means that this base station has synchronized to ano
11. Display Index of Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Voip Networks Using this dropdown box a VolP network may be assigned to the selected Group name Gateways Using this dropdown box a Gateway may be assigned to the selected Group name A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 121 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 122 4 7 2 10 WBM gt Media Gateways gt Phonebooks Using this table different LDAP Server and Phonebook Servers may be assigned to a specific group of a selected Media Gateway Media Gateways Phonebooks Group Group Name LDAP Server Phonebook Server 3 OSV Branches 004 SRV GRP LDAP 1 003 SEV GRP Phonebook 1 4 Grp Ulm OSO 004 SR Vv GRP LDAP 1 003 SR v GRP Phonebook 1 Media Gateways 003 MGvv Ulm A The table contains the following columns Group Index Unique Index of Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Group Name Display Index of Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM LDAP Server Using this dropdown a specific pre configured LDAP Server may be assigned to the selected group Phonebook Server Using this dropdown a specific pre configured Phonebook Server may be assigned to the selected group A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 4 8 Group Configuratio
12. Example for Segments RPNs LAL 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FP Pee Atk WON eS OO RPN 1 15 RPN 16 RPN 32 RPN 48 RPN 64 RPN 80 RPN 96 RPN 112 127 RPN 128 143 RPN 144 RPN 160 RPN 176 RPN 192 RPN 208 RPN 224 31 47 63 79 95 11 1 159 175 191 207 223 239 w Segment Relative Index Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU Using this dropdown box the Dect module has to be assigned a relative Index related to the selected location segment inside the MGW The number of Relative Index entries is defined by the dropdown box at page Media Gateways gt Dect gt Segments RPNS LAL Depending on the selected Segments RPNs LAL the dropdown box contains different entries Example for Segments RPNs LAL oon ou A Nie ie Bee HE 4 Cc Ne Oo 15 wv v 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 The combination of Segment and Segment Relative Index will be calculated by the WBM to the resulting RPN A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 149 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 150 RPN Since the configuration of the RPN is implicitly accomplished by assigning the Segment Relative Index to a specific Segment
13. Microphone off Back A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Appendix Handset UI 259 Appendix Handset UI 8 3 2 2 Holding State English Holding State Conference ES Call hangup Microphone off Back 8 3 2 3 Call Waiting English Call Waiting Call accept Call hangup Microphone off Back 8 3 2 4 Call Completion English Call Back L Call Back E Delete All Back 8 3 2 5 Pickup Call English Pickupcall r Calling No CalledNo Back A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 260 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Appendix Handset Ul 8 3 2 6 Phonebook Access during Local HOLD English Phoneb SystemPhonebook LDAP Phonebook Back 8 3 2 7 Conference English Conference active Microphone off Calll hangup Call2 hangup Back 8 3 3 Specific Service Menu Actions 8 3 3 1 Set Defaults Using this feature all user specific handset configuration will be reset to their default values CallForward settings All settings set to Deactivated all numbers set to confi gured VM number in corresponding group CallWaiting settings Deactivated 8 3 3 2 Conferencing It is possible to initiate a conference with two other participants Therefore the conference imitator has to put the first connected user conference participa
14. Unregister To remove the DECT registration of the handset for the selected User Deregis tering the handset the button Unregister has to be activated TestCall This option performs a test call to the handset The handset of the selected User must start ringing if already registered The call may be accepted at the handset but no speech connection will be established or the test call may be terminated by clicking on button OK ant to hang up A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 131 Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU Hangup An active Test Call may be terminated by clicking on using this button 4 9 1 2 User Search Options Due to the high amount of users which may be configured at a MGW IWU up to 20000 itis neither technically possible nor practically recommended due to long load times to display a table inside the WBM with e g 20000 rows Therefore for display issues at the WBM the whole table with all entries is separated into several sub tables with a configurable number of lines per sub table which will facilitate to step through all entries on a sub table base To minimize the time for finding a specific user entry search functionality is part of the new concept Only an exact match search is available The search parameters are not stored and therefore are lost after a logout of WBM or restart reboot of MGW IWU Search functionali
15. Up to version V1R3 of HPCIP the differentiation between internal and external ringing was exclusively based upon the length of the calling number WBM gt Group gt InternCallLen A call which calling number is less or equal to the confi gured InternCallLen was handled as an Internal call Therefore if the Intern CallLen is configured to 0 all calls are handled as External calls Starting with HPCIP V1R4 the distinctive ringing information of the SIP message is used primarily If no distinctive ringing information from the SIP message is available the differentiation is based according the configured InternCallLen 5 10 1 Technical Background Information The SIP PBX signals the information about the source of the incoming call PBX internal external This information is coded in the alert info header Some platforms use a Bellcore drx coding some use the info alert internal external some use both The information about the source is transferred by IWU to the DECT handset where the information is used to select the ringing tone Example for a combined info Internal call Alert Info lt Bellcore dr1 gt info alert internal External call Alert Info lt Bellcore dr2 gt info alert external Hint OpenScape Branch doesn t send distinctive ringing information A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 215 Feature Descriptions 3 Party Call Control 3PCC 5 11 3 Party Ca
16. 1234 F ual 3 v 763 763 Support 763 default siint F 7 1 v 761 761 Sales 761 761 sanna F F 5 Change the contents of the following fields UserName necessary Configure the Name or Number for the registration of the User at the PBX This configuration example uses the UserName 761 762 and 763 AuthName optional Configure the AuthName which is used for the authentification at the PBX together with Password This configuration example uses the AuthName 761 762 and 763 Password Optional but necessary if an AuthName is configured The password which is used for the authentification at the PBX together with AuthName This configuration example uses the Passwords 1234 2345 and 3456 Hint The entries in the password field are visible only at the time of adding or overwriting a password After applying the changes the password fields are masked out and nor visible anymore 6 Apply the changes by clicking the Apply button at the bottom section o Configuration saved 7 Confirm the message box by clicking on OK 8 To append further users to the configuration repeat the steps above A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 59 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Dect About 3 1 9 Configure further BSIP Only to the system Attach one further BSIP1 for Small Solution or two BSIP for Server Solution to a PoE port of
17. 4 9 Users Configuration IWU On the sub configuration pages below VoIP Users User Voip and Dect the individual users and their properties regarding User general user properties Voip registration via VoIP and Dect can be configured HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 html wbm pro html HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY User User User Enabled DisplayName Comment Language Groups v 101 Sales 1 Deutsch 003 OSV Branches 102 Sales 2 Deutsch 003 OSY Branches 103 Sales 3 Deutsch 003 OS Branches 104 Support 1 Deutsch 003 OSV Branches 105 Support 2 Deutsch 003 OSY Branches 106 Support 3 Deutsch 003 OS V Branches 107 Support 4 Deutsch 003 OS Branches 108 Support 5 Deutsch 003 OSV Branches 108 Administration 1 Deutsch 003 OSY Branches 110 Administration 2 Deutsch 003 OS V_Branches 111 Administration 3 Deutsch 003 OS V Branches 34511 Deutsch 002 OSV Headqua 34512 Deutsch 002 OSV Headqua S 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 8 1 I IS S S ISI S 3I S s Delete User Edit User Register Multi Register Unregister Testcall Hangup Search Scope Column MSN Search String 0 Max Lines 50 Step Size 50 Previous Next A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 128 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configu
18. CC settings If this option is deselected the corresponding context menu in the Handset UI is not available For details refer to Section 5 13 Call Completion CC CCBS MSN Busy CallCompletion The option is needed to configure the MSN which has to be dialed to activate the CCBS feature at the PBX For details refer to Section 5 13 Call Completion CC CCNRy Msn NoReply CallCompletion The option is needed to configure the MSN which has to be dialed to activate the CCNRy feature at the PBX For details refer to Section 5 13 Call Completion CC A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Group Configuration IWU CC DeleteAll Msn CallCompletion The option is needed to configure the MSN which has to be dialed to deactivate all CC events at the PBX For details refer to Section 5 13 Call Completion CC CPU Call Pickup Group Enabled This option enables the functionality for newly introduced Call Pickup Group feature For details refer to Section 5 16 Call Pickup Group CPU CPU Msn Call PickupGroup The option is needed to configure the MSN which has to be dialed to activate the CPU feature at the PBX For details refer to Section 5 16 Call Pickup Group CPU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 127 Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU
19. Dect ARI On this configuration page the access rights ARI Access Right Identity for the individual Base Stations as seen from the Handsets are configured Dect Ari Index Module Number MGV Enabled Name Cipher Segment Segment Relative Index Rpn 2 009 y CL 1 2 y 0 5 001 v Bslp 2 001 y 2 RPN18 31 1 16 6 002 v Bslp 2 002 v 2 RPN 16 31 2 17 i 003 v CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 4 The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Module Number MGW Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages A description of these can be found in chapter 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base Cipher only available in Unify Admin mode By activating the ciphering feature the communication between the handset and the configured base station is encrypted The setting is automatically applied to all base stations to the same value The default value is enabled Hint The ciphering method uses the System Pin to cipher the DECT speech connections of the handsets on air The System Pin is transmitted to the handset during the registration process Segment Using this dropdown box the Dect module has to be assigned to a specific location segment inside the MGW The number of location segments is defined using the dropdown box at page Media Gateways gt Dect gt Segments RPNs LAL Depending on the selected Segments RPNs LAL the dropdown box contains different entries
20. For a BSIP platform this functionality may be used alternatively to the procedure of factory reset by power sequencing described at Section 1 8 Factory reset of BSIP1 After initiating this function the BSIP will start in Application mode BSIP Only and with an ip address of 192 168 1 1 Server platform For a Server based platform the Server will start in Application mode Server IWU and with an ip address of 192 168 2 1 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 85 Configuration reference Administration IWU 86 Network State By clicking on button Network states a new windows will be opened which displays summarized information about the network settings Simultaneously a DHCP request will be initiated Further details may be found in chapter 5 2 DHCP The Network State also displays the status of the SIP Survivability parameters For details refer to chapter 5 7 SIP Survivability Network configurations of BSIPl ApplicMode IWU Network Gateway settings Ip Address Network Mask Default Gateway DHCP enabled Dns Server 1 Dns Server 2 Network Destination Network Mask Gateway Tos Value Qos Value VLAN Id Time Server enabled Timezone Time Server Ip DECT settings Server Ip Server Network Mask Listen Port VLAN Id IWU as Gw Dect VPN Enabled Dhcp Boottime Status Actual Status Ip Address
21. HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 7 Contents 5 14 6 2 Specific pattern search 0 hn 227 5 15 MST SIP Stacks z oie quite sete EOE baie RIS eae ie Ee nee T eats ee ede a 228 5 16 Call Pickup Group CPU 000 cc tte eee 228 5 17 Call Waiting CW rare a d a A e hrs 229 5 18 System Phonebook 0 00 ete 230 5 18 1 Sample Phonebook Configuration File 20 0 eh 231 5 18 2 Using the phonebook reso edsa aeea a a hh rr 232 5 19 RTP Negotiation Part 1 003 sets Lupi el Ba is J ER A ea ie SA a TENERAS 232 5 20 Dynamic BSIP ChangesS 0c ene teens 232 5 20 1 Dynamic changes Edit module 000 233 5 20 2 Firmware Download to a single BSIP Fw Download 0 20 0c eee eee eee 233 5 20 3 Replacing module Replace module sssseeeeree Re 233 5 20 3 1 Procedures for Replacing a BSIP 000 cette eee 233 5 20 3 2 Procedures for Exchanging the 1588 Sync Master 0 00 0c cece eee eee 234 5 21 Warrbownload te ek pended cates Pied ah even Bede M ye eem ciple deese de Per p ren 235 5 22 SIPoVer TOP cant tints tu arius dr LEVE M Mere rA Mf Mes LEA M n esa 236 5 22 1 Reusing SIP TGP Potts nnd eee eu RD aae wa eue ed gas US CN E Ub CE 236 5 23 Handset Specific Issues 2 hr 236 5 23 1 Handling of Idle Display 2 0 RR I n 237 5 24 System Startup Procedure 0 0 ccc ehh 237 5 25 Support of Assigne
22. Network Mask Default Gateway Dhep Server Dns Server 1 Dns Server 2 Gateway 013 lt 014 lt LDAP status LDAPServerNBUB Ip Address Status 192 168 100 114 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 105 FALSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TRUE GMT 01 00 192 168 100 50 192 168 10 114 255 255 255 0 10500 0 TRUE disabled lt 192 168 201 102 gt 5060 lt 192 168 201 103 gt 5060 asvl gt Ip 1 OSB1 gt Ip 1 192 168 100 125 offline no response A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference MGWNetwork MGW 4 4 MGWNetwork MGW On the MGWNetwork page which is available in MGW mode only the core configuration of the MGW is applied Only the basic necessary configuration to establish a communication with the MGW IWU is needed here This configuration is restricted to the Media Gateway IWU network All further configurations e g the Media Gateway DECT network are done at the MGW IWU centrally HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 81 html wbm pro html session id 122121 9448ic 13972116831517ic 139721168 I E capture mouse pointer P fo ej 9gi Sl HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G unire S MGWNetwork MGWNetwork Name MGW Berl
23. a connection to the HPCIP system and sends the alert back the IWU will display Alerting in e If the handset doesn t respond in about 12 seconds the call will be discon nected by the IWU for both call legs SIP reason 404 Not Found f the call was successfully established IWU will display Connected in e Ifthe called handset disconnects the call IWU will display Located on Ifthe calling party disconnects the call IWU will first display Disconnected and after a short period of time Located on f the MGW of the located users goes offline the IWU will display Located Off CaSync This field displays the Carrier number on which the connection for User User is active A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Status User Mibs Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU TsSync This field displays the Timeslot number on which the connection for User User is active 4 12 2 3 Configuration Page Status User Mibs In Msn DisplayNa 1 001 101 2 001 102 3 001 103 4 001 104 5 001 105 5 001 106 7 001 107 Home MG 001 MGVV_Berlin_1 001 MGW Berlin 1 001 MGW Berlin 1 001 MG Berlin 1 001 MGWv Berlin 1 001 MGWv Berlin 1 001 MG Berlin 1 VOIP Loc on M 001 MGW Be 001 MGw Be 001 MGV Be 001 MGVV_Be 001 MGwv Be 001 MGW Be 001 MGW Be VOIP St ae ee a
24. number of the called party When the calling party answers a new call to the original destination is dialed automatically Hints Depending on the PBX the calling user can activate more than one callback to different called parties There is no indication on the calling user phone that a callback is activated Since the calling parties phone has no information about the activated callbacks no selective cancelling of specific callbacks is possible The calling user only can delete all callbacks A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 221 Feature Descriptions LDAP Phonebook 5 14 LDAP Phonebook 222 5 14 1 General The LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol feature provides the phone user with the ability to query a centralized Directory Service such as a Corporate Directory hosted on a remote LDAP server and to display the directory entries that match the search criteria It provides the user with a convenient method of finding and using telephone numbers The Directory Access feature does not support updating the central directory The results of the queries are not stored persistently at the phone and queries have to be repeated if the data is needed again Since each customer s central or corporate directory has its own structure with respect to its data item names which items can be used in a query and which items can be returned in a response the phone s user interfac
25. see above this information cannot be changed and serves for information purposes only 4 10 6 Configuration Page Dect Call Advanced mode This page is only displayed in Unify Admin mode at the WBM Dect Call Index Module Number MGA Enabled Name NumOfChannel Jitter 2 009 v CL 1 2 0 0 5 001 v Bslp 2 001 10 8 6 002 v Bslp 2 002 10 8 7 003 v CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 0 0 The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Module Number MGW Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages A description of these can be found in chapter 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base NumOfChannel only in WBM mode Admin In UnifyAdmin mode the configuration for number of channels is configured at this sub page In Normal mode the configuration may be found at configuration page Dect Base The standard value is 10 For MGW setups the max number of dect channels has to be reduces refer to Section 2 12 2 3 Max no of BSIP per MGW Jitter In UnifyAdmin mode the jitter buffers for the Dect Module may be configured here Don t change the value from its default A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Dect About Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 4 10 7 Configuration Page Dect About This configuration page is only for information purposes on the created DECT configuration Click on Scan to
26. the corresponding debug module The options of the lower part of the configuration page have the following meaning Console By activating this entry the Debugging functionality via the Console application is enabled The entry contains the associated UDP port number for Remote Debugging Listen port The entry contains the associated UDP port number for Remote Debugging This value is specific for the different debugging modules The default values are Server 11000 IWU 11050 Voip 0 n a Setupapplic 11100 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 155 Configuration reference Debugging Configuration IWU 156 Logfile By activating this entry the Debug output is written to the associated Log files You may choose exclusively between Option Logfile or Syslog Logfile Name This entry read only shows the name format of the Log file created Syslog By activating this entry the Debug output is written to the associated Syslog server You may choose exclusively between Option Logfile or Syslog Hint IWU debugging messages are logged to a configurable syslog daemon with Facility LOCAL1 and SEVERTIY Level ALERT Start Syslog If option Syslog is enabled activating this option starts a process which sends the syslog messages to the syslog server configured by option Syslog Server Ip If this option is deactivated no syslog messages are sent to the syslog server
27. unir 9 Administration Administration Configuration Configuration Restore Config Backup Config Program Info Active System Version System 1 System Update Reboot Board Version System 2 Shutdown Board Applic Mode BsipOnly Factory Setting Network State 3 1 4 2 HPCIP Server Server Solution The HPCIP Server is accessible via its factory default IP address 192 168 2 1 To access the Server WBM you have to configure an IP address in the network 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 e g 192 168 2 101 on your maintenance PC A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution If the IP address 192 168 2 1 is already used in your network you first have to directly connect the maintenance PC and the Server via Ethernet This may be accomplished by using a direct Ethernet cable or via a separate Ethernet switch where only the Maintenance PC and the Server are connected Test via ping if the Server is replying to the ping requests ping 192 168 2 1 If not check all cabling switch settings e g VLAN configuration Ensure that the configured local IP of the maintenance PC address is up e g ping 192 168 2 101 If you don t get replies you should access the Server locally by keyboard and monitor Start the Web browser at the Maintenance PC Access the WBM Web based management at the following URL http 192
28. whatever event comes first BS OVL 70 Cnt This counter displays how often the BSIP has allocated equal or more than 70 96 of the available channels For a standard configuration of a BSIP with 10 calls per BSIP the counter is triggered if 7 calls are active on the DECT side BS OVL 100 Cnt This counter displays how often the BSIP has allocated 10096 of the available channels For a standard configuration of a BSIP with 10 calls per BSIP the counter is triggered if 10 calls are active on the DECT side A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 4 12 4 Pages Base Status Mibs 1588 RSSI These four pages contain the status the corresponding Mibs counters the 1588 states and counters as well as the RSSI values for the MGW s The Base states are displayed at sub page Base Status The Base Mibs counters are displayed at sub page Base Mibs The Base 1588 Ethernet synchronization counters are displayed at sub page Base 1588 The Base RSSI values are displayed at sub page Base RSSI 4 12 4 1 Options at Lower Frame Search Scope MGW 001 MGVY_Berlin_1 wv Cycle s 0 from 10 04 2014 11 17 44 inited Refresh to now Clear Statistics Previous For details of the lower panel containing further display options refer to Section 4 12 1 General Status Information 4 12 4 2 Page Base Status Status Base Status
29. 0 when also using a CLASS C ip network 192 168 x y for the Infrastructure network 6 2 1 Scanning of BSIP V1R1 with IWU V1R2 and newer As a drawback when adding factory equipped Base stations running V1R1 to a HPCIP IWU running at least V1R2 they will not be scannable since they didn t respond to SCAN requests others than 192 168 255 255 Important note The following instructions apply to newly added BSIP which have version V1R2 running If they are already running V1R2 or newer there are no special steps to consider There are two different procedures to overcome of this situation 1 Manually update the newly added BSIP locally This method is suitable if a small amount one to three BSIP should be added Manually connect the first new BSIP and connect to its local WBM Initiate a local update to the same version as running on the IWU Ifthe active partitions differ between IWU and BSIP after updating and rebooting login again and initiate the update again to synchronize the partitions between IWU and the newly added BSIP Disconnect the currently updated BSIP from the network and attach the next one otherwise there will be IP address conflicts since all factory reset BSIP are equipped with 192 168 1 1 and then follow the instructions below 2 Temporarily move the DECT network to V1R1 settings This method is suitable if a great amount more than three BSIP should be added Temporarily revert to a DECT IP
30. 10 111 255 255 255 0 10500 E 0 The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Index This column displays the index of the MGW Local This value cannot be changed Enabled For a Media Gateway Local this entry is always enabled and cannot be changed Name For a Media Gateway Local this entry is always set to MgwLocal and cannot be changed Dect Serverlp This field contains the IP address of the Media Gateway Local inside the DECT network This IP address is used for communication between the Media Gateway Local and all BSIP Only The factory default Ip address is 192 168 1 1 which may not be saved inside the configuration of the IWU Hint The configured IP address may not be located inside the network of the configure Voip Infrastructure Ip address For detail refer to Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing Dect Netmask By default a netmask of 255 255 255 0 24 bit is configured for the DECT network Please keep in mind that using another netmask than 255 255 0 0 will prevent BSIP ONLY running with firmware V1R1 being found in SCAN For detail refer to chapters Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing Section 6 2 Adding new BSIP Dect Listen Port This field defines the IP port on which the communication between the Media Gateway Local and all BSIP Only inside the MGW is established The default value is 10500 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation
31. 168 2 1 Log in to the WBM with the following case sensitive credentials Username Unify password 1q21q2 Press the Login button The configuration page for the HPCIP Server appears HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hife 192 168 2 1 htmljwbm_pro html session_id 172422 0248ic 13971434698677 c 139714346988 C E capture mouse pointer P fF Dr H V acquire Englisch Deutsch W rterbuch HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unif HiPath Cordless IP Administration Uni x E HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unif unify Administration Administration Configuration Configuration Restore Config Backup Config Program Info Active System Version System 1 System Update Reboot Board Version System 2 Shutdown Board Applic Mode MGW IWU Applic Made MGW Factory Setting Network State A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 51 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Ip Address Network Mask Default Gateway DHCP Enable 52 192 168 100 1 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 83 3 1 5 Configuration of VolP Infrastructure network Since configuration of the IP VoIP Infrastructure Network settings requires a reboot of the IWU BSIP1 or Server these settings are configured initially To a
32. 711 only if these values are reached so further calls are restricted to G 711 Two call conditions have to be differentiated see table below 1 The Maximum Call Limit is reached No further calls may be established or accepted 2 A Partial Call Limit is reached Further calls may only be established or accepted with codec G 711 Handling of Maximum Call Limit For an outgoing call Handset gt PBX at the handset Channel occupied is displayed and a Busy tone is played e For an incoming call PBX gt Handset the call is refused at the SIP Interface with a SIP message 503 Service unavailable Handling of Partial Call Limit For an outgoing call Handset gt PBX codec G 729 is removed from the codec list at the SIP Interface in the INVITE message Therefore the codec list will only include G 711 codecs G 711a and G 711u For an incoming call PBX gt Handset codec G 729 is removed from the codec list at the SIP Interface in the OK message after the Call was accepted at the handset Therefore the codec list will only include G 711 codecs G 711a and G 711u Depending on the PBX used and the configuration of the remote party especially for devices which use G 729 exclusively the call may be not signaled at all or disconnected after the hook off procedure A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 204 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Codec G729 Table of Call Control Li
33. C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Meanwhile you may connect the maintenance PC to a switch port via a ethernet cable Hint The BSIP1 must reside inside the same layer 2 network segment The devices MUST NOT be separated by layer 3 Routing devices Only separation via Layer 2 switches is supported 3 1 3 2 HPCIP Server Server Solution Connect the HPCIP Server FSC Rx100 S8 to mains the necessary peripheral components monitor and keyboard and connect the network port using an Ethernet cable with a Standard or PoE Port of a network switch Boot the Server with the installation CD of the HPCIP Server Software Install and configure according the appropriate instructions which are not part of this documentation Remove the CD and reboot the server again with the newly installed HPCIP Server software Hint Possibly an update to the latest released HPCIP Server Version V1R4 should be accomplished Optionally update twice so that the active system partition is Partition 2 Since all newly attached BSIP also come up with System partition 2 as the active partition 3 1 4 Configure BSIP Server for IWU mode 3 1 4 1 HPCIP BSIP Small Solution The BSIP1 is accessible via its factory default IP address 192 168 1 1 in BSIP Only mode To access the BSIP Only WBM you have to configure an IP address in the network 192 168
34. Config 3 2 Quick Start MGW IWU System 3 3 Further steps 66 The basic steps for installation and setup of MGW IWU and MGW are described in Section 6 6 Installation of MGW IWU system 3 3 1 Radio frequency site survey A radio frequency site survey has to be performed Within this step also the synchronisation concept has to be designed implemented and tested The radio distance between two BSIP should be adapted to ensure a reliable handover of a handset at 70 dB Omit situations where the default location of a handset is located at the roaming handover border of two basestations In this case the handset will permanently toggle its assigned base station e In contrast to a single cell Dect system where a maximum radio coverage is achieved a multi cell Dect system is not optimized for maximum radio coverage of each single base station The coverage is optimized in a way that the basestations don t interfere mutual This distance is based on the handover distance of 70 dB 3 3 2 Synchronisation implementation The syncronisation implementation should be part of the radio frequency site Survey For details of synchronisation via air refer to chapter 1 4 Synchronization Over Air Concept For details of synchronisation via Ethernet refer to chapter 1 5 Synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration referenc
35. Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe c 192 168 100 80 html wbm pro html session id 122444 4328ic 1397211885838 ic J HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY Network Network Server Local Servers Index Enabled Name IpAddr Type Password Poll Timer 1 v SRV LOC NTP 192 168 100 50 NTP 0 v SRV LOC DNS SYS1 192 168 100 50 SYSTEM DNS 1 v SRV LOC SNMP L 192 168 100 129 SNMP v SRV LOC SYSLOG1 19216810050 Syslog v SRV LOC DNS SYS2 192 168 100 50 SYSTEM DNS 2 Add Server Delete Server Edit Server Import ServerConfig Show ServerConfig Load Phonebook Ip Address 192 168 100 80 HTTPS Enable m Cos Value Timezone GMT 01 00 Ams v Network Mask 255 255 255 0 VLAN Id Default Gateway 192 168 100 105 4 5 1 General Network Configuration At the bottom of the configuration page Network the general network configu ration of the IWU network is accomplished Refer to the concepts of networking described in chapter 1 3 Network Concept A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 89 Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU Ip Address Network Mask Default Gateway 90 192 168 100 80 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 105 Hint All changes will be activated after a reboot of the IWU HTTPS Enable o Cos Value 0 w Timezone
36. Gateway entries is supported during running system services A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 108 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 4 7 2 1 General Media Gateway Configuration In the lower part of the sub pages in the first group left to the spacer the following options are available Delete Media Gateway Replace Media Gateway Edit Media Gateway Scan MGW Signal Listen Port 10600 MGW Control Listen Port 10601 Delete Media Gateway By selecting a Media Gateway and clicking on Delete the selected Media Gateway entry is deleted Replace Media Gateway Replaces the Media Gateway with another hardware Concept is similar to replacing a basestation Edit Media Gateway Replaces the Media Gateway with other hardware Concept is similar to replacing a base station Scan This functionality Scan initiates a Seek or Scan of all MGW which have regis tered before at the MGW IWU During the SCAN all information are requested using an ip unicast mechanism If the MGW answers it sends its current configu ration information mainly its own IP address IP address and listen port of the MGW IWU its name and VPN configuration to the MGW IWU where it is displayed MGW Control Listen Port This field defines the IP port on which the signaling control communication between the MGW IWU and all MGW is established The default value is 10600 MGW Config Listen P
37. HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 8 6 Abbreviations Appendix Abbreviations Abbreviation Description ARC Dect terminology Access Rights Class ARD Dect terminology Access Rights Details ARI Dect terminology Access Rights Identity EIC Dect terminology Equipment Installer s Code FP Dect terminology Fixed Part FPN Dect terminology Fixed Part Number FPS Dect terminology Fixed Part Sub number IPsec IP Security LAL Dect terminology Location Area Level Media GW Short term for Media Gateway Media GW IWU Short term for Media Gateway IWU MGW Short term for Media Gateway MGW IWU Short term for Media Gateway IWU PARI Dect terminology Primary Access Rights Identity PLI Dect terminology Park Length Indicator PP Dect terminology Portable Part RFPI Dect terminology Radio Fixed Part Identity RPN Dect terminology Radio fixed Part Number VPN Virtual Private Network A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 265 Appendix Acronyms 8 7 Acronyms 266 Acronym Description Media Gateway IWU or HCIP Management Server mode A new entity introduced in HPCIP V1R5 Handles logical call connection and communicates with the Media Gateway via IP Centralized configuration for nearly all parameters Sites Media Gateways Basestations User PBX Media Gateway or
38. HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Dect Fundamentals Next Displays the previous group of rows with an offset of Step Size Sort functionality If a specific user entry was selected while a sort was applied the selected row will be the first entry in the sorted list If no user entry was selected while a sort was applied the row containing the first sort criteria will be the first entry in the sorted list If possible the search will be maintained if switching between subpages Hint Combining both Sort and Search functionality is possible 5 28 Dect Fundamentals 5 28 1 Location Area In V1R4 and former versions of HPCIP a fixed Dect LAL Location Area Length of 31 was used Using this LAL value each base station built its own location area In case the handset changed its physical location to another base it initiated a Roaming to the other base station by sending a Dect LOCATION request For each change of the base a separate LOCATION was send If the handset was located between two or several bases it toggled its roaming area very often by sending a LOCATION request In large setups where a high number of handsets are used these may lead to a unnecessarily high signaling rate of LOCATION request In V1R5 the LAL is freely configurable The new default LAL is 35 which corre sponds to the LAL used on a SLC device on a HiPath 3000 4000 system Using this LAL 16 bases are located in
39. Mean Time as well as the parameters for daylight savings About 75 different time zones are available which should cover nearly all regions of the world The appropriate Timezone for Germany is GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Rome Stockholm Vienna Hints Activating a changed Timezone setting requires a reboot of the IWU Confi guration of a Timezone on a BSIP IWU is reasonable only in the context of a configured NTP server The width of the Timezone column may be changed by dragging the scale element at the lower right corner see figure GMT 06 00 Central Am GMT 06 00 Central Tim GMT D6 00 Guadalajara GMT 06 00 Saskatchew GMT 05 00 Bogota Lim GMT 05 00 Eastern Tim GMT 05 00 Indiana e A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SIP Survivability 5 7 SIP Survivability 5 7 1 Support of Outbound Proxy Choosing the outbound proxy option in the HiPath Cordless IP solution means that all SIP related traffic is routed directly to the outbound proxy independent from the domain name or IP address that is configured for the SIP server proxy registrar For each SIP gateway of the HPCIP solution the option Outbound Proxy can be activated deactivated per checkbox In case outbound proxy is activated a valid IP address must be entered in the field Outbound Proxy For this option the usage of a domain
40. Other Options sia SL Le ee pet aces AERE ep nme ee ee ee ye eee tea ee inn 83 4 4 MGWNetwork MGW 0 0 060 nee 87 4 5 Network Configuration IWU 0 0 0 0 0 00 tees 89 4 5 1 General Network Configuration sssaaa ccc teens 89 4 5 2 Local Server and Group Server 000 ects 93 4 5 2 1 General Server Configuration llli 93 45 3 Eocal Se Vet c es cies ee Ce xD CC Cete D Reb Qe ees RS EORR eee E RE a ae GRE TR nb ed 95 4 5 4 Group Server 2s osuere adu den ae a eee YR abb e eet RR e Ri Ye dos 96 4 6 SIP Configuration IWU lle RR RR HI hrs 97 4 6 1 Configuration Page SIP gt General llsissslleseese hn 98 4 6 2 Configuration Page SIP gt SIP Settings 0 ccc teens 100 4 6 3 Configuration Page SIP gt Survivability 0 20 0000 102 4 7 Media Gateways Configuration liliis rr 103 4 7 1 Media Gateways BSIP IWU and Server IWU 0 00 eee tee 103 4 7 1 1 Media Gateways gt Dect BSIP IWU and Server IWU 00000 ccc else 104 4 7 1 2 Media Gateways gt Dect Network BSIP IWU and Server IWU lsilslsls else 105 4 7 2 Media Gateways MGW IWU sssssseesess rrr 108 4 7 2 1 General Media Gateway Configuration 00 00 es 109 4 7 2 2 WBM gt Media Gateways gt General 0 00 cee ett eee 110 4 7 2 3 WBM gt Media Gateways gt Dect 1 2 0 0 00 0c c cette eee 111 4 7 2 4 WBM gt Media Gat
41. Registration of the Handset Lia Handset registered e Ifthe handset does not ring please read chapter 7 Troubleshooting FAQ concerning possible reasons The IPUI of the registered handset is displayed in hexadecimal notation in the user entry User Dect Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment HandsetType Ipui Park registered 1 v 761 761 Sales Sen 0082081085 101B82FF900 2 v 762 782 Marketing Sen 0000000000 3 v 763 763 Support Sen 0000000000 6 Select the user again and click on TestCall The registered Handset will start ringing You can accept the call at your handset no voice data will be transferred or terminate the test call by clicking OK If the handset does not ring please read chapter 7 Troubleshooting FAQ concerning possible reasons You can register further handsets for already configured VolP users now or to a later time After registering several users telephony functionality should be available You should be able to establish calls between the handsets A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 65 Quick Start Quick Start MGW IWU System 3 1 11 Quick Start Completion After you have accomplished some successful test calls you may configure all additional Users and additional BSIP Only in your System At this step it s a good idea to backup the configuration For details refer to chapter 4 3 1 2 Button Backup
42. TOS Value you can configure the prioritization of the IP packets via TCP IP Layers according to DSCP It is only used for the IP DSCP field for VoIP Signalling SIP and VoIP data RTP packets towards the PBX VoIP Infra structure Network Other IP packets e g e WBM or SSH towards the VoIP Infrastructure network or e packets between BSIP Only and BSIP IWU DECT Network are NOT tagged with configured the DSCP value Default 0 i e no prioriti zation Using the dropdown you may select one of the pre configured ToS values CoS Value With the CoS Value Class of Service you can configure the prioritization of the Ethernet packets via Ethernet Layer2 according to 802 1p Default 0 i e no prioritization Using the dropdown you may select one of the pre configured CoS values Hint CoS relies on the configuration of a VLAN unequal to 0 VLAN Id The corresponding VLAN Id according IEEE 802 1q inside the VoIP Infra structure Network in case of a BSIP IWU and Server IWU or inside the Media Gateway IWU network in case of MGW IWU is configured here VLAN configuration is activated if the VLAN Id is configured to a valid VLAN Id unequal to 0 If VLAN is activated VLAN Id unequal 0 the IWU sends and expects tagged Ethernet packets Therefore the switch port to which the IWU is connected to has to be configured to tag the Ethernet frames with the VLAN Ids If VLAN is deactivated VLAN Id equal 0
43. a configuration file If the security settings are not valid the configuration file will not be donloaded and the WBM session will be closed There is an issue on some installations when backing up the configuration After initiating the backup process the information panel will be displayed and after wards you are logged out from the WBM To overcome this situation you have to change the following settings in IE e Tools InternetOptions Security e Select the appropriate zone in which the IWU is located e g Trusted sites and select Custom level A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 255 Appendix Configuration Hints for Web Browser e Inthe outline view browse to Downloads and change the setting of Automatic prompting for file downloads from Disabled to Enabled Hint IE9 and higher may require the Compatibility mode for configuration of HPCIP otherwise only a blank screen may be displayed after Login to WBM A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 256 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 8 2 LED States Operating State LED 1 LED states during start sequence of BSIP Appendix LED States LED 2 LED states during operation state BSIP not ready Services not started or starting BSIP ready No LAN link BSIP ready No Connection to ML BSIP ready All DECT frequencies blocked or all available DECT channels occupied BSIP rea
44. addition the display of a portable handset is not watched regularly so an idle display text is not really useful Therefore Limited Mode is shown on the display in case of Call setup for incoming or outgoing calls In case of an active call during reception of the SIP NOTIFY message no action for that handset take place at all If OpenScape Branch OSB goes into survivability mode the OSB sends a Notify message for each phone to the HPCIP server Event server mode backup The HPCIP server sends 200 OK back for each NOTIFY message When OSB goes back to normal mode another NOTIFY Event server mode normal is sent from the OSB for each subscriber and a 200 OK is received for each NOTIFY 5 7 6 Detection of Failure of SIP Servers Since HiPath Cordless IP support SIP over UDP only a failure of the connection to a SIP server is only detected by SIP signaling timeouts The reception of a SIP 503 response code will not be interpreted as a server failure Therefore the detection of a SIP server outage will be detected at latest with the next re register cycle default 120 sec Hint OSV is able to send a retry after value in the REGISTER response message OpenScape Office and H4K will not do so Therefore the Re Register interval may be controlled by the OSV A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 209 Feature Descriptions SIP Survivability 1 0 1 Survivabilty Information The outpu
45. all BSIP1 the BSIP1 have to be synchronized During the synchronization process the BSIP Only will receive its configu ration values from the IWU 11 Apply the changes by clicking the Apply button at the bottom section 4 Warnings in configuration Configuration saved 12 Confirm the message box by clicking on OK 13 A debug window will appear Info Validation details Level 4 Module Code Lvl W0063 1 s BsIp Room 2 012 enabled has the wrong server ip address W0099 1 n BsIp Room 2 012 IpAddrFromModul 192 168 10 204 IpAddrToModul 192 168 10 2 V0100 1 BsIp Room 2 012 IpAddrServerFromModul 192 168 10 111 IpAddrServerToModul 192 168 10 1 W0248 1 BsIp Room 2 012 ModulSystemVersion V3 34 22 SystemVersion V4 0 13 W0063 occured l times W0099 occured l times W0100 occured 1 times W0248 occured l times total warnings 14 Confirm the Debug Window by clicking on OK 15 Start the synchronization process by clicking the Sync button at the bottom section A message box will appear A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 62 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Setting Ip address of all enabled Devices and reboot them if IpAddr differ Continue 16 Confirm the message box by clicking on OK The following process will transfer the new settings to all BSIP Only Therefore the BSIP Only will be reboote
46. are transferred to the other system partition A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference WBM overview IWU 4 1 4 Configuration Objects The WBM consists of several pages with topically structured configuration options of the IWU Software These pages can be selected via the Tabs in the upper part of the WBM The buttons on all configuration pages on the bottom right have the following meaning Logout This functionality will logout the current user from the WBM session After you have finished configuration it is good practice to logout from the WBM session Help The Help button starts the browser based online help system Info Displays current version license and hardware information as well as the software license agreement HiPath Cordless IP Version V1 R5 1 0 5 Apr 10 2014 08 49 15 Software License Agreement HiPath Cordless IP is property of Unify GmbH amp Co KG This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extend possible under the law Unify SystemInfo Board info Goldenboot BSIPl V1 0 R0 1 12 081023 CTR6 Img 1 50 Systeml Normalbootl 1 1 6 V1 01 V0 32 0 MSP Kernell 2 6 21 1 V1 2 0 V0 32 0 CSP Kernell 2 6 21 1 V1 5 0 V0 32 0 CSP Ro
47. authentication Name is necessary if a PBX requires authentication of the user Digest authentication In case of digest authentication the AuthName and Password are sent to the PBX as part of the registration process Password Here the password is configured which is required together with the AuthName if the PBX requires digest authentication The password entries are masked out by using five asterisk characters Only at time of editing a new password entry or overwrite the existing one the characters are displayed A maximum of 63 characters consisting of the following digits are supported Ui a z A Z 0 9 I 96 ge pns tn mns nan onn npn nn omm omen mm E un WO HH ne WW HS HV Wo nm p 009 3 34 3 0 3 G729 The usage of low bandwith codec G729 is intended for devices which are connected to the PBX via low bandwith lines DSL e g for home office users using a SIP phone e g OpenStage Therefore bandwith is an issue for such A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 135 Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU 136 User Dect Index 1 2 3 Enabled iv v scenarios Inside the LAN efficient bandwith should not be an issue therefore codec G711 should generally be used In this scenario there should be no need to configure G729 in the codec list of the PBXs Gateway Codec configuration page Activating the codec
48. be functional Restart the registration process if you did not succeed registering your handset in the provided period of time The time is limited to avoid foreign handsets regis tering Multi register The Multi register process eases the process of creating and registering a large amount of users To start the Multi Register process at least one user entry with start values has to be configured manually This entry serves as a template for the creation of further users during the Multi register process Select an existing enabled User entry this serves as the template user After clicking on Multi register a handset may be registered directly After successful registering of the handset a user entry with the IPUI of the handset is automatically created The user values are automatically incremented from the last created user A new handset may be directly registered afterwards This process may be repeated several times A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 130 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU Multi register mode started waiting for handset registrations New handset registration ipui 00B2C810B5 added user ipui 00B2C810B5 msn 00112 index 9 Cancel The Multi Register process may be stopped by using the CANCEL button Detail regarding the Multi register process may be found in chapter 6 3 Multi Register Bulk Registering of Handsets
49. be moved to the next right position new behavior Deletion of digits To delete the digit left of the cursor use soft key lt C Navigation To navigate inside the search string use the soft keys and gt A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 227 Feature Descriptions M5T SIP Stack 5 15 M5T SIP Stack To move the cursor right for entering the next letter use soft key gt and press the corresponding alphanumeric keypad multiple times to select the desired letter or digit For available digits refer to Section 8 5 Key mappings for Handset menus Important note The IWU appends the wildcard string to the entry which was configured at the handset It is not necessary to type the wildcard letter manually To start the search press soft key Ok As soon as the LDAP server delivers the requested data the first three entries of the phonebook are displayed The sort order is determined by the LDAP server To navigate step by step use the Softkeys and After an entry is selected it may be dialed directly by pressing the green off hook key Using the soft key Ok instead will open the phonebook entry and display the name and phone number The display entry may be dialed also by pressing the green off hook key The following table denotes the SIP User Agent strings of HPCIP in different versions HPCIP Version User Agent String V
50. call established will slow down the WBM interaction For planned service issues e g re configuration adding users or BSIP it is recom mended to schedule these actions in a time frame of low call utilization since this will improve WBM interaction A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 205 Feature Descriptions Timezone Support 5 5 3 Support for G 729a SDP IP DECT supports two variants of the G 729 codec Besides the existing support of G 729ab G 729 with silence compression HPCIP also additionally supports G 729a G 729 without silence compression Besides the existing user specific configuration option for G 729 WBM User VoIP Table gt G729 an option WBM gt User gt VoIP Table gt SC Silence Compression is available which enables G 729ab or disables G 729a the silence compression feature After updating to 3 34 14 existing users have Silence Compression enabled new users are added with Silence compression disabled due to the issues described in the above chapter Disabling the Silence Compression is the suggested for all users which have G 729 activated since conferences may be distorted otherwise see section above The call limiting feature is not affected for G 729a calls The same rules apply as for G 729ab 5 6 Timezone Support 206 A Timezone may be selected on WBM page Network Gateways This Timezone defines the time shift to GMT Greenwich
51. can hold their own configuration although it is copied from one partition to the other during a firmware update Both partitions store their application mode BSIP Only or BSIP IWU A factory reset is always applied to the current system partition It does not affect the settings of the other partition Hint Similar to the BSIP IWU the Server IWU contains the same partition concept as described above A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Introduction Factory reset of BSIP1 1 8 Factory reset of BSIP1 A Factory Reset resetting the BSIP1 to its default configuration may be performed either by e a local login at the WBM of a BSIP Only using the Factory Reset button or e aspecial power sequencing cycle e g if the BSIP WBM is not accessible using the ethernet cable at the BSIP Both methods are resetting the active partition of a BSIP1 to its factory default configuration The factory reset by power sequencing is applied by the following process 1 Power on the board by plugging the ethernet cable see note 2 Wait 5s 3s wait 7s 3 Power off the board by unplugging the ethernet cable 4 Repeat steps 1 3 three 3 times 5 Boot BSIP1 to OS The successful factory reset is indicated by fast red flashing of both LEDs e Note If you provide power to the board by connecting the ethernet cable using a PoE Switch power may NOT provided immediately Due to the
52. combined to build a cluster of up to 5 Media Gateways per site This concept may permit the minimi zation of needed resource counters at the IWU by using several smaller Media Gateways at a site instead of one large one In this case the number of resource counters decreases but the number of needed hardware for the Media Gateway s increases A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 27 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Dependencies between User Group MGW and PBX Each of this Media Gateway type is able to handle the number of max concurrent DECT calls derived from its type definition 30 60 90 or 120 Dect calls according the following table Media Gateway Max Max concurrent Max concurrent Resource Type BSIP Call streams DECT calls Counter MGW 30 120 120 30 2 MGW 60 120 120 60 4 MGW 90 120 120 90 6 MGW 120 120 120 120 8 2 2 3 Site A Site represents a new logical system entity by grouping 1 to 5 physical Media Gateways by means of a Site Id Between each of this MGW inside the site Roaming and Internal Handover may be possible Between two sites only Roaming is possible but may be disabled by means of configuration All Media Gateways with the same Site Id are belonging to the same site To assign a MGW to a specific site this Site Id is used 2 3 Dependencies between User Group MGW and PBX 28 2 3 1 Traditional Concept
53. done locally at the corresponding Media Gateway Therefore it is necessary to ensure that WBM access from MGW IWU to MGW is possible An update of basestations only excluding the MGW itself may be initiated at the WBM of MGW IWU 2 11 2 1 Update from V1R4 When updating from V1R4 to V1R5 you may run into a licensing issue When updating a HPCIP system the CLC data always is copied from the old to the new partition In case of updating from V1R4 to V1R5 CLC data of V1R4 is copied into the partition of V1R5 Since the default grace period CLC data of V1R4 only contains 1 Server and 1000 Basestations in contrast to 100 Server and 12000 basestations in V1R5 only 1 MGW IWU and 1000 Basestations will get a valid license in case of grace period To break the barrier of 1 Server and 1000 basestations it is necessary e to install a valid license or e toinstall a V1R5 starting from a V1R5 Installation CD which already contains the larger grace period values of 100 Server and 12000 basestations 2 11 3 Licensing The CLA is running on the MGW IWU and contains a license controlling the number of MGW license object Server and the total no of BSIP license object Basestation as nowadays in a Server IWU The effort to license the no of MGW is realized by using the currently license object Server As in current version V1R4 the license method First comes first serves doesn t change A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cor
54. have to configure an IP address in the network 192 168 2 0 255 255 255 0 e g 192 168 2 101 on your Mainte nance PC A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 49 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 50 If the IP address 192 168 2 1 is already used in your network you first have to directly connect the Maintenance PC and the BSIP1 via Ethernet This may be done with a direct Ethernet connection via the power injector or via a separate Ethernet switch where only the Maintenance PC and the BSIP1 are connected Test using ping if the BSIP1 is replying to the ping requests at ip address ping 192 168 2 1 If not check all cabling switch settings e g VLAN configuration Ensure that the configured local IP of the maintenance PC adress is up e g ping 192 168 2 101 Start the Web browser at the Maintenance PC Access the WBM Web based management at the following URL http 192 168 2 1 Log in to the WBM with the following case sensitive credentials Username Unify Password 1q21q2 Press the Login button The configuration page for the BSIP1 in BSIP Only mode appears HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 2 1 htmljwbm pro html session id 010134 2638ic 13971406924697ic 139714066 HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G
55. is possible to switch the Application Mode between Server IWU Media Gateway as well as a Media Gateway IWU similarly to the application mode switch between a BSIP Only and a BSIP IWU The Media Gateway IWU may be installed directly on a supported hardware platform Rx 100 S8 or may be installed on a virtualized session on VMware ESXi5 Important note Due to timing issues virtualization of Server IWU and Media Gateway is NOT supported The Default Application mode after a reset is Server IWU The IP Addresses of Server IWU Media Gateway and Media Gateway IWU don t differ and remain to the current IP address of 192 168 2 1 Switching the Application modes will lead to a factory reset of the destined Application mode after reboot 2 11 1 Initial Setup of Media Gateway If a Media Gateway has to be setup only core parameters which are needed to communicate with the assigned Media Gateway IWU have to be configured locally via WBM at the Media Gateway site All further configuration including the DECT and SIP configuration is accomplished centralized at the MGW IWU All DECT Basestations have to be attached and physically available at the confi gured Ethernet interface All BSIP have to be located in the correct partition and firmware version Therefore all BSIP located at the current MGW are updated using the central update of the MGW or updated locally using the Fw Down button This Concept is similar to existing hand
56. mode to MGW and reboot the currently running Server IWU After reboot the virtual machine works in MGW mode Access WBM via 192 168 2 1 has to be changed later Login via WBM Configure necessary parameters e g IP address of MGW IWU Reboot Access WBM via configured IP of MGW and verify parameters 6 6 5 Initial Setup of MGW IWU Install the MGW s as described above and attach the first MGW to the network Further MGW s should be detached or be Shut downed at this point Repeat the step for each MGW Login to the WBM of MGW IWU and select page MediaGateways General A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Troubleshooting FAQ DECT 7 Troubleshooting FAQ 7 1 DECT 7 1 1 BSIP Only Not Found Using Scan Please check the following Is the missing BSIP1 connected with the power supply LED states OK Is the network cable connected at the IP DECT Base Station Is the network cable connected to an Ethernet Switch Please check the Status LEDs at the relevant Ports of the Ethernet Switch The IP DECT Base Station must be located in the same Ethernet segment as the IWU IWU and Base Station cannot operate in different Ethernet segments connected via an IP Router VLAN configuration issues Newly added BSIP are not recognized and displayed by SCAN during running system services Stop the system services and repeat the SCAN If firmware V1R1 is already running on BSI
57. modules and has to be unique inside the range of 1 120 To avoid the uniqueness the special value 0 may be configured for disabled modules several times Enabled By activating this option this Base Station is enabled for the assigned MGW Hints e The BSIP IWU displays a maximum of 12 modules whereby maximal 10 modules may be enabled The Server IWU displays a maximum of 100 modules whereby maximal 60 modules may be enabled e The MGW IWU displays a maximum of 120 modules per MGW whereby a maximum of 120 modules may be enabled In case of using several MGW s inside a site the number of DECT modules will be decreased by each Crosslink and each Virtual base configured by the IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU Name A descriptive name for the Base Station can be configured here e g physical location like building Floor Room no where the BSIP is installed later This name serves only for internal configuration and identification purposes NumOfChannel only in WBM Standard mode Number of voice channels of the Base Station The maximum value is 10 If less than 10 parallel voice channels shall be supported a smaller value may be configured here The default value is 10 IpAddr Module The IP address of choice for the Base Station in the IP DECT network is entered here Please take care that the IpAddr M
58. not possible Two different setups have to be distinguished but which are supported both e Setup 1 WAN link is located between the firmware image and the mainte nance PC browser e Setup 2 WAN link is located between the maintenance PC browser and IWU For Setup 1 WAN link is located between the firmware image and maintenance PC browser the IWU has no knowledge about the progress of the file transfer Therefore a message box will appear until the file transfer to the maintenance PC has been downloaded completely For Setup 2 WAN link is located between the maintenance PC and IWU a window will display the progress of uploading the firmware file from the mainte nance PC browser to the IWU The counters reflect the amount of bytes received and the total amount of the file A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 235 Feature Descriptions SIP over TCP 5 22 SIP over TCP Starting with HPCIP V1R4 the SIP transport protocol SIP over TCP is supported additionally to SIP over UDP The SIP signaling transport protocol is configured on a per gateway base The protocol may be changed at WBM gt Network Gateway gt SIP Settings gt Gateway gt Transport Protocol The default value is UDP For OSO use transport protocol UDP For OSV use transport protocol TCP 5 22 1 Reusing SIP TCP Ports After a stop of the system services the SIP TCP ports towards the PBX remain connected
59. or by a specific network route Network Destination The usage of a Default Gateway is the recommended routing method Using the method Network Destination the values for Network Desti nation Network Mask and Gateway have to be configured At the Mainte nance PC a corresponding route has to be configured A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution This configuration example uses the Default Gateway IP address 192 168 100 83 https To encrypt the http communication activate the https access mode Time Server Ip Since the BSIP1 has no hardware clock time has to be set according a NTP or SNTP time server After activating the NTP Server it may take some minutes upon activation of the NTP service This is due to the nature of time synchronisation between NTP server and NTP client In contrast to the BSIP1 the Server has a built in hardware clock However usage of an accurate time by using NTP is suggested This configuration example uses the NTP Server IP address 192 168 201 94 Set the Timezone to an appropriate zone e g GMT 01 00 Amsterdam Berlin Rome Stockholm Vienna Switch to configuration page Network Gateways gt Servers Add an NTP server entry by clicking on Add Server Enable the new entry configure the ip address of the NTP Server in filed IpAddr select NTP as Type All other fil
60. page the table with the DECT RSSI values is displayed Hint The selection of Basestations may be narrowed to the DECT modules belonging to a specific Media Gateway using the Dropdown box Module below The table has the following structure Lines Tx 00 Rx 11 On these lines the timeslots Tx00 Tx11 and Rx00 Rx11 are displayed Columns CO C9 On these columns the carriers CO C9 are displayed Cell values bbb bbb inside a line timeslot indicates that this is a timeslot with a beacon sent signal One cell in the line shows the signal level receive level of the received value of the channel allocation of other DECT devices This value shall be as small as possible sss Hint This option is only applicable for air synchronization sss in a line timeslot indicates that this is a timeslot with a synchronization signal received SYNC signal One cell in the line shows the carrier on which the sync signal is received on as well as the signal level receive level of the Sync signal This value shall be as high as possible 50 dB 80 dB Important note For accurate and stable synchronization over air a minimum signal strength of 75 dB resp 16 RSSI should be achieved in a line timeslot indicates that this is a Tx timeslot with a voice channel unidirectional signal The timeslot number of the Rx channel is Tx Channel 12 One cell in a Tx line displays the value of
61. pressing the back button several times or use the red on hook button A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 211 Feature Descriptions Message Waiting Indication MWI 212 The number of the VoiceMail system is already available in line 2 of the menu and is preselected with the configured VoiceMail number from the WBM Normally there is no need to change this number Otherwise select the entry and change the number according your needs Leave the service menu by pressing the back button 5 8 1 1 Connecting to the VoiceMail Box There are three different ways to connect to the voicemail box 1 Simply dial the number of the Voicemail system as usual 2 Open the service menu and select Call lists gt Voice Mail and press the green off hook button 3 If the MWI is blinking press the MWI button the service menu Call lists is activated automatically and select Call lists gt Voice Mail and press the green off hook button 5 8 1 2 Retrieving the number of messages The IP DECT system is able to display the number of unread and read messages using the service menu Call Lists The first entry in the list displays the number of unread read messages Please keep in mind that not all information is signaled from each PBX For details refer to Section 5 8 1 4 PBX specific MWI functionality 1 6 Vo1ceMal 1 3 missed 0 0 forwarded es ee tS eee Hints The
62. reference Users Configuration IWU 134 Enabled When activating this element the selected User is enabled at the IWU MSN The MSN needn t to correspond to the Subscriber Number of the User at the PBX usually the User Name in the PBX The MSN is internally used by the IWU to identify the users internally For uniqueness the length of the MSN has to be the same for all users Different length MSN s may result in unavailability of the user for incoming calls To avoid different length MSN s you may prefix the MSN with 0 digits to achieve the assigned fixed length DisplayName The handsets will display this value in its idle display The activation of the DisplayName at the handset is initiated by different events For details refer to Section 5 23 1 Handling of Idle Display The following characters are treated as valid characters for the DisplayName wn Blank amp A s DE s E he ae rs Ua Q 9 usn er et gt ira A Z ane a z Since the length of the display name in the Idle display of the handset is limited to 10 characters larger display names will cause a validation warning Comment The field Comment serves only as a reference for the system administrator of the IWU It may contain for example the type of the Handset the full name of the belonging user or the name of the department if the Handset is not associated directly to a person This field has no influence on
63. rh 66 3 9 Further Stepsi st a etes th epe e Rec EDT PON Ape au E baden cR RA UE RR A 66 3 3 1 Radio frequency site survey ena res ae ra Ee m mn 66 3 3 2 Synchronisation implementation liliis rn 66 4 Configuration reference cese re eel ee Ree orem Ni ang ee mu a a acne nn Dec a n n ee 67 4 1 WBM overview IWU herri r n OE E EEE E EAN hh hh 67 4 1 1 Different WBM modes WBM Users n 67 4 1 2 Limited Features in WBM mode Unify 0 0 00 tte ee 68 4 1 2 1 BSIP IWU Server IWU MGW IWU 2 tees 68 41 3 Login to WBM ihe tee Be ree naly eI IRR EE ys ean LANE EG LE care Gear UR was 69 4 1 3 1 Multiple WBM sessions 20 000 H3 ae 69 4 1 3 2 Login and Password change 0 cece ee eee ae 70 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 4 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Contents 4 1 3 3 Changing a WBM User s password 00 0 eects 70 4 1 4 Configuration Objects 2 0 0 ete 71 4 1 5 Configuration Systematic 20 0 0 cee eee 73 4 1 6 Debug Windows i2 ERR eee nee fee See ee Ls pee e AER Pe ee pe I 73 4 2 Administration BSIP Only 0 00 00 a 75 4 3 Administration WU os irureun rereua eee 78 4 3 1 Frame Configuration sssaaa aaaea tnt tte teens 78 4 3 1 1 Button Restore Config n eassa anaana 78 4 3 1 2 Button Backup Config nanena aaua 79 4 3 2 Frame Program Info s i ranio o E eee 81 4 3 2 1 System Update 0 0 0 teen ee 82 4 3 2 2
64. the IWU towards the BSIP IpAddr Server This field displays the IP address of the DECT Server IP DECT network read with Scan e Hint If this IP address differs from the configured Server IP see page DECT a SYNC process has to be established which transfers the settings of the BSIP configured at the IWU towards the BSIP Server Port Broad This field displays the IP port of the BSIP Only on which the BSIP Only is commu nicating with the IWU see option ListenPort on WBM page Dect as read from the Base Station with Scan Mac Addr This field displays the MAC address of the BSIP as read from the Base Station with Scan A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 4 10 8 Configuration Page Dect Debug Advanced mode This page is only displayed in Unify Admin mode at the WBM Dect Debug Index Module Number MGV Enabled Name Debug Disable Debug Lvl 2 009 v C2152 0x00000000 5 001 V Bslp 2 001 7 0x00000000 6 002 W Bsip 2 002 o 0x00000000 7 003 y CL 1 2 Bslp 1 0 E oxooo00000 On the sub page Debug various logging and debugging functions may be activated for the individual DECT modules Based on these functions potential problems in the DECT section may be investigated For the analysis of the Log files profound knowledge of the DECT technologies is essential Therefore debugging is intended primarily for our s
65. the default gateway has to be entered here VLAN Id The VLAN Id of MGW IWU network is configured here Cos Value The CoS Value if VLAN unequal 0 for tagged packets is configured here MGWlwu Ip Address The IP address of the Media Gateway IWU inside the Media Gateway IWU network is configured here MGW Control Listen Port The listen port of the MGW IWU for the Control connection between MGW and MGW IWU TCP is configured here This value has to match the correspondent value configured at the MGW IWU at page Media Gateways otherwise no communication will be possible MGW Signal Listen Port The listen port of the MGW IWU for the Signaling connection between MGW and MGW IWU TCP is configured here This value has to match the correspondent value configured at the MGW IWU at page Media Gateways otherwise no communication will be possible A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU 4 5 Network Configuration IWU The Network Gateways page known from V1R4 has been spilt in to separate main pages network and SIP This Network page contains the Local Settings of the IWU some other global parameters and the configuration of additional servers NTP SNMP LDAP DNS which is accomplished on two subpages The configuration of the PBXs will be accomplished on the subpages below the new main page SIP HiPath
66. the functionality of the WBM Language The language used for display messages of the handset is selected here Groups Choose a Group and therefore an associated VoIP gateway from the dropdown box to which the user is associated to A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation User Voip Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU 4 9 3 Configuration Page User VoiP On this page the parameters for the SIP registration of the User at the PBX and the assignment of the subscriber numbers can be configured Enabled Index 1 y 2 v 3 v Msn 00101 00102 00103 DisplayName 101 102 103 Comment UserName AuthName Password G729 SC Sile Sales 1 101 101 seiat m T Sales 2 102 102 E I I Sales 3 103 103 ua E E The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Enabled Msn DisplayName and Comment are repeated on all sub pages A description of these parameters can be found in the previous chapter 4 9 2 Configuration Page User User Details regarding the correlation between the values used in the PBX configu ration and in WBM may be found in the corresponding chapter in the Service Manual UserName Assign a User Name which is used for the registration at the PBX This may bea name or a number depending on the PBX or the provider For the supported gateways only numbers are allowed AuthName The
67. the network switch of the DECT Network or via a power injector to a standard port of the network switch Inside this configuration example the first BSIP for a Small Solution the BSIP IWU is configured as the synchronization master for the Over Air synchroni zation The second BSIP is configured as synchronization slave 1 Wait about 2 minutes until the LED states at the BSIP Only change to perma nently green and red At the WBM of the BSIP IWU switch to configuration page Dect About To scan the newly attached second BSIP click on the button Scan e scanning modules The newly attached BSIP1 should be found automatically and a record will be appended for it in the table of DECT devices l Modul Ena 001 v 2 002 v Basestati Version Hw Partlnfo1 Partin IpAddr Module Ip amp ddr Server Ser Mac Addr 000000000 4 013 Apr 102014 08 49 15 5 n a nia 192 158 123 192 158 123 10500 00 00 00 00 00 743065890 Y3 34 22 Oct 14 2013 15 23 33 7 V3 34 22 Active V3 34 192 168 110 204 192 168 10 111 10500 00 1a e8 21 b4 If the BSIP1 is not found please read the chapter 7 Troubleshooting FAQ concerning possible reasons At the WBM of the BSIP IWU switch to configuration page Dect Base The BSIP Only has to be configured for usage within the HiPath Cordless IP system Select the newly created entry for BSIP Only and change the contents of the following fields Dect Base l Modul
68. tible In this case this BSIP cannot be used with IP DECT system HwRev This field displays the hardware revision Q No of the BSIP as read with Scan This information is displayed only ifthe BSIP is running version 3 34 15 or higher otherwise 0 will be displayed Partinfo1 This field displays the version number of the firmware running on partition of the belonging BSIP Only as read by a Scan Additionally the label Active indicates that this is the active partition of the BSIP For a BSIP IWU Type BslpLocal this information may be derived from page Administration gt Version System 1 resp Version System 2 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 151 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 152 Partinfo2 This field displays the version number of the firmware running on partition2 of the belonging BSIP Only as read by a Scan Additionally the label Active indicates that this is the active partition of the BSIP For a BSIP IWU Type BslpLocal this information may be derived from page Administration gt Version System 1 resp Version System 2 IpAddr Module This field displays the current IP address of a BSIP Only as read with Scan Hint If this lp address differs from the configured IP address lpAddr Module on page DECT Base a SYNC process has to be established which transfers the settings of the BSIP configured at
69. user accepts the call Hint Autoanswer functionality is not supported CTI Call In Number B Name B Reject Tone o Incoming CTI Call at A party The number of the B party and if available the name of the B party is displayed As for a normal incoming call the functions Reject and Tone off can be used A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions 8 Party Call Control SPCC CTI Call out Number B Name B After the incoming call has been accepted by pressing the green off hook key the display switches to the state of an outgoing call The further call flow doesn t differ from a standard outgoing call flow 5 11 1 Technical Background Information 3pCC means using the late SDP mechanism The initial INVITE for call setup does not contain any SDP In the 200 response the phone signals its SDP and a re negotiation is needed to negotiate a valid SDP For HPCIP it is necessary to distinguish an incoming CTI call from a normal incoming call A CTI call is identified by the following methods e SIP INVITE message without SDP and Header which contains Alert Info Bellcore dr3 used by OSO e SIP INVITE message without SDP and a FROM Header which contains CTI Assisted used by OSV SIP INVITE message without SDP and a Header with Alert Info lt Bellcore dr4 gt info alert autoanswer used by OSO An incoming 3pCC call to the A par
70. voice connections can be established via this Base Station 1588 master Configures the Base station to use Ethernet Synchronization over Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 as Sync master Clock master Only one BSIP may be configured as 1588 master A BSIP IWU may not be configured as 1588 master e 1588 slave Configures the Base station to use Ethernet Synchronization over Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 as Sync Slave Clock Slave air 1588 master This type of module combines an air slave with a 1588 sync Master It is needed for inter MGW synchronization Using this module type one base on a MGW Slave may act at this MGW as a 1588 master and additionally retrieve the sync from the MGW Master to assure all BSIP at MGW Slave are running synchronously to those of the MGW Master to ensure DECT handover capability Module of type CrossLinkSrv or CrossLinkCli e n a A synchronization method is not applicable e ext master This Crosslink side Source side serves as the destination for a virtual base This correlation is only virtual since no physical correlation is made directly Instead this crosslink side references to a physical base by means of ParkSync x If the value is changed from n a to ext master the IWU will automatically create a module of type Virtual Base on the MGW of the crosslink s opposite side Destination side This module will be automatically configured by the IWU with a sync settin
71. which information has to be signaled to the DECT phone 5 9 Enhanced Display Information During the alerting phase and the connected state of an incoming call the name of the caller is displayed on the handset Since several names may exist for the number the name is displayed according the following priority order 1 Local phonebook entry of handset may be displayed some seconds after another name of priority 2 or 3 see Technical Background Information 2 System phonebook entry 3 Display name of SIP message 1 Display name as delivered from PBX or remote party 2 Configured Display Name of user as configured by WBM if no display of PBX or remote party name is delivered 5 9 1 Technical Background Information Requesting the local phonebook is an asynchronous process Therefore the display name from the local phonebook may be presented after the display of an already available element system phonebook or SIP display info Note LDAP is not used to resolve phone number to names 5 10 Distinctive Ringing 214 The Distinctive Ringing feature provides the ability for subscribers to hear different ringing indications for internal within the same PBX and external calls This feature permits the subscriber to distinguish internal and external calls based on the melody defined in the handset A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Distinctive Ringing
72. 0 5 v i uc A2 001 MGW Berlin 1 0 5 v v 3 003 MG A Ulm 0 3 v vi The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Index This field contains a unique Index of the group entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM DisplayIndex The Display Index of the group is displayed here This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected group entry is enabled at the IWU Name Enter a descriptive name of the group A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Group Configuration IWU Gateways only available for BSIP IWU Server IWU Select the assigned Gateway for this Group via the select box Hereby the assignment between a specific user to a specific gateway PBX is configured MediaGW List only configurable for MGW IWU For each Media Gateway which should be assigned to the current group an entry of the Media Gateway Index has to be inserted using a comma separated list Example 1 2 4 7 In this example only the MGW with index 1 2 4 and 7 belong to the belonging group Hint The permission for a specific handset to use the Bases of a MGW and therefore gain system functionality at this site MGW relies on the assignment of its user entry and its group assignment by using this MediaGW List If no entry of the MGW index of the users group exists the user
73. 0 E 222 0 3 v MG Ulm 192 168 223 254 255 255 255 0 10500 E 223 0 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 113 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 114 The table contains the following columns Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name A unique name for the Media Gateway may be configured here e g Site Id the MGW is located and name of MG This name serves only for internal configu ration purposes but doesn t uniquely identify a MGW Dect Serverlp This field contains the IP address of the Media Gateway inside the DECT network This IP address is used for communication between the Media Gateway and all BSIP Only Hint The configured IP address may not be located inside other networks of the HPCIP system For detail refer to Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing Dect Netmask By default a netmask of 255 255 255 0 24 bit is configured for the DECT network Please keep in mind that using another netmask than 255 255 0 0 will prevent BSIP ONLY running with firmware V1R1 being found in SCAN For detail refer to chapters Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing Section 6 2 Adding new BSIP Dect Listen Port This field defines the IP port on which the communication between
74. 1 0 255 255 255 0 e g 192 168 1 101 on your maintenance PC If the IP address 192 168 1 1 is already used in your network you first have to directly connect the maintenance PC and the BSIP1 via ethernet This may be done with a direct ethernet connection via the power injector or via a separate ethernet switch where only the Maintenance PC and the BSIP1 are connected Test via ping if the BSIP1 is replying to the ping requests ping 192 168 1 1 If not check all cabling switch settings e g VLAN configuration Ensure that the configured local IP of the maintenance PC adress is up e g ping 192 168 1 101 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 47 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution If you don t get replies consider to reset the BSIP to its factory defaults see chapter 1 8 Factory reset of BSIP1 Start the Web browser at the Maintenance PC Access the WBM Web based management at the following URL http 192 168 1 1 HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe amp 192 168 1 1 html wbm_login html2ic 1397140016810 E Googe Plt e o Bly HiPath Cordless IP Admit Log in to the WBM with the following case sensitive credentials Username Unify password 1q21q2 Press the Login button The configuration page for the BSIP1 in BSIP Onl
75. 1 Connected State eos urhriricvenscterfiepert era EPA REA whoa nee iR HUE d 259 9 3 2 2 Holding Stale 2 s eR REREAERRE E baa See a leek eave EDT MEER e Tet 260 9 3 2 9 Call Waiting ossis pete van Tace e hatte exi que ea DER ED E ER XENIM 4B 260 9 3 2 4 Call Completo Mierea tte ett e eM EE VE NK Ee ERE MERIEIENME MEE TEE 260 9 3 2 5 PIck p Gall occ od hein ited et Re oat dae ON Mead EPLERENCD PF X age inpsi we 260 8 3 2 6 Phonebook Access during Local HOLD 0 0 00 ccc eee res 261 8 23 27 GOMIEFENCE o cs S a eae eis ese UR MU SMS na Pee ae eae ada a 261 8 3 3 Specific Service Menu Actions l l 261 9 3 9 T Set Defaults 5 nente ber Rei ex pei vbi WEM oes Gud A NEE wa 261 9 3 9 2 Conferencing us oer sene phi e T eR ULTOR GU aud RUE EXE ER aaa a 261 8 4 System TONES roi sende peso oe mE RP E EXC Eae AERE RON e PCR OR E E RUNE 262 9 4 1 Dial tone op de aca he ex KE ed reset eta Mae Page es EXE Vice ec a nece 262 8 4 2 Gallingitorie e mbebsix eLcubetikd ene rnit D EET ERIS INeLCSSDX c eile 262 9 4 9 BUSY TONG 5 etr RR Ub bos bxc c eetbsta mbi bbeeSU PET DEDE is 263 8 4 4 Call waiting tone vv sod sada a etal te ba X aad oe aaa eel va Pea Sad VETERE 263 8 5 Key mappings for Handset MENUS eie oa eraan taa n RKA hh 264 8 6 ADbreviationS une trades e bei aa he eee gle a n 5 a dat Boe wale a bes a ad 265 Bef AGTODVITIS s s iei aA e teque uer Riteald atio dobed od aug etre ae Ve okie adv dominate atte a 266 1c
76. 10 20 or 30 msec is received in the SDP IP DECT will use this ptime in the SDP of the outgoing OK and will sent the RTP packets using the received ptime regardless of the configured ptime of its gateway If no ptime is received IP DECT will send its RTP packets equal to the configured packet size of the corresponding gateway If the received RTP packets are unequal to 10 20 or 30 msec this will lead to halfway or distorted voice connec tions no or distorted voice at IP DECT side If a ptime other than 10 20 or 30 msec is received this call is rejected with SIP reason 415 Unsupported Media Type 5 4 2 Implementation for Outgoing Calls from IP DECT If a ptime equal to 10 20 or 30 msec is received in the SDP answer IP DECT will sent its RTP packets equal to the received ptime packet size of the SDP answer If no ptime is received in the SDP answer IP DECT will sent its RTP packets equal to the configured packet size of the corresponding gateway If a ptime other than 10 20 or 30 msec is received this call is disconnected with BYE IP DECT will send a ptime of 10 20 or 30 msec equal to the configured packet size of the corresponding gateway WBM Network Gateway SIP Settings Packet Size ms in the SDP of the outgoing SIP INVITE A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 201 Feature Descriptions Codec G729 5 5 Codec G 729 202 5 4 3 Restrictions IP DECT has buil
77. 11 G 711 G 711 G 711 G 711 Hangup after connect 1 G 729 G 711 G 729 G729 G729 G729 G711 SIP phone G711 G 711 G 711 optiPoint G 729 OpenStage 6759 G711 G 729 G 711 G 729 No call G729 exclusive establishment 2 1 Call Processing receiver is alerting After Connect of B party call Disconnects 2 Call Processing receiver is NOT Alerting due to common codec Interoperability with optiPoint 150 S If using the OP150S with activated G 729 the option Silence suppression has to be disabled Otherwise the G 729 voice connection between an OP150S and a HPCIP handset will de disturbed Priority G72X G 711A gt G 711U vj G 72X Select G 729AB vj G 711U 20 v ms Cl silence Suppression G 711A 20 v ms Cl silence Suppression G 723 30 v ms ilence Suppression G 729AB 20 v ms Suppression A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 203 Feature Descriptions Codec G729 5 5 2 Call Control for G 729 Call Limiting BSIP IWU only A call control feature has been added limit the number of G 729 G 711 connection s at a BSIP IWU The limits are adapted dynamically depending on the number of G 729 and G 711 calls G 729 requires more CPU resources than G 711 connections The Call Control limits the following values Number of calls depending on the actual combination of G 729 and G 711 calls see codec table below and e Limits the codec list to G
78. 1R3 and older Ikon Voip V1 0 unknown V1R4 ikon Voip M5T SIP Stack 4 1 8 14 5 16 Call Pickup Group CPU 228 The handsets in a group may be configured as a member of a Call Pickup CPU Group When a call is made from a user A party to one member of the group B party any member of the group C party can answer the call by pressing the group pickup menu item The configuration of CPU is accomplished on a group specific base at the WBM WBM gt Group gt CPU Call pickup Group Enabled WBM gt Group gt CPU Msn Call pickup Group If option CPU Call pickup Group Enabled is activated the feature CPU is generally activated and the corresponding menu for CPU of all handset inside the current group will be displayed if necessary A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Call Waiting CW The MSN for registering to the CPU is a PBX specific configuration option Please keep in mind that only those handsets in the HPCIP group are signaled if they are additionally configured as a member of the group at the PBX If the state of the pickup group changes from inactive no handset is ringing into active at least one handset is ringing all other handsets in the group which are not already occupied receive a SIP notify and IWU initiates a service call by air To signal the pickup call at the C party handset the idle display of the C party ha
79. 2 1 Conceptual Overview MGW IWU mode 0 0000 cette nee 25 2 1 1 Graphical Overview of System Entities lille 25 2 1 2 Graphical Overview of Media Gateway ssssselseeee nn 26 2 2 System Entities Le RR XM Mee IARE e D Y ERR qe Ves genres 26 2 2 1 Media Gateway IWU 2 0 0 eher ren 26 2 2 2 Media Gateway sia antaisin a hh 27 2 2 2 1 Media Gateway TypeS 0 00 cette eee 27 2 2 0 SUS sa aah Paved eee aR Sead aide xe UI a uoLgsenisie eir e E a eet due dns 28 2 3 Dependencies between User Group MGW and PBX 2 2 2 0 00 eee 28 2 3 1 Traditional Concept 1 2 sssaaa saana eaae 28 2 9 2 New Concept iui aes eae aes ies e x peo ier e ed ede et Mad ae eed ved des 29 2 4 ser Boaming rs a ett ea DE Ee rede ee een cee eave oe ah CE Uer qe 29 2 5 DECT Roaming and Handover 0 00 c ect ete eee 30 2 5 1 Description of former Dect Roaming Concept 000 cette eee 30 2 5 2 Description of new Dect Roaming Concept 000s 31 2 6 IP Boamihg 2 verge hd net ward ote ve lee ew de See Va es dw ites 31 2 7 Network Concept Media Gateway issues hr 31 2 8 Feature Concepts 0 e a i r a baa eher 32 2 8 1 LDAP and LDAP Phonebook 0 00 cece teen rr 32 2 8 2 System Phonebook esia si a aaa ai ea a aio ehh rh 33 2 9 Specified System Limits anaana aeaaaee 33 2 40 Definitions reete ini e Rd dee eed Re d Vb tut JO Rui elt e ed pt e ra 34 2 10 1
80. 31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 117 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Cos Value Cos Value of the Media Gateway IWU network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan The corresponding CoS Value for the Media Gateway CL network is configured here 4 7 2 7 WBM gt Media Gateways gt About This page displays the table of configured Media Gateways The contents inside the table are read only Media Gateways About a UNE ETE EERT URN NER URRUEUAUNEEUUEUNI Index Enabled Name Version Partlnfo1 Partinfo2 IpAddr Main Mac Addr 1 v MGVV_Berlin_1 V4 0 13 Apr 10 2014 08 57 57 v4 0 10 V4 0 13 Active 192 168 100 81 00 0c 29 05 a5 1c 2 v MGN Berlin 2 V4 0 13 Apr 10 2014 08 57 57 v4 0 10 V4 0 13 Active 192 168 100 82 00 0c 29 a0 6c 43 3 v MGA Ulm V4 0 13 Apr 10 2014 08 57 57 v4 0 10 V4 0 13 Active 192 168 100 83 00 0c 29 32 f2 7c The table contains the following columns Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name A unique name for the Media Gateway may be configured here e g Site Id the MGW is located and name of MG This name serves only for internal configu ration purposes but doesn t uniquely identify a MGW Version This field displays the version number and the version
81. 4 3 LDAP Map File Hints The LDAP configuration files have to be coded in ANSI with LINUX style linebreaks ASCII 10 LF or Windows DOS style linebreaks ASCII 13 CR ACII 10 LF The LdapServerName configured in the LDAP MapFile will be displayed in the output of the NetworkState in section LDAP status A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 223 Feature Descriptions LDAP Phonebook 224 The LDAP map files are stored in the backup file of the IWU The LDAP map file has to be assigned a file extension of conf e g Ldap conf Otherwise the file could not be loaded Unsupported configu ration file format 5 14 4 Sample LDAP Configuration File 5 14 4 1 Built in LDAP server of OpenScapeOffice OSO MX Starting with V3R2 of OSO a LDAP server is part of this PBX Using the local LDAP Server feature of OSO requires a special OSO license of type OpenDi rectory Base Please keep in mind that depending on the string which is configured in field Name of the OSO station configuration different fields in the UC configuration as well as the resulting LDAP fields are mapped OSO converts the following strings from WBM gt ExpertMode gt Station gt IPClients gt SIP Clients gt Name to the following fields in WBM gt Applications gt UC Suite gt User Directory gt First Name AND Last Name as well as the corresponding standard LDAP fields The
82. 5 According to the figure above the following relations exist e Several users may be assigned to one Group n 1 WBM gt User gt User gt Groups e Each group may be assigned to several MGW s 1 n WBM gt Group gt MediaGW List In case of a BSIP IWU or Server IWU the groups can only be assigned to the MGW Local Each MGW may be assigned to one PBX 1 1 inside a specific group WBM gt Media Gateways gt VoIP Gateway 2 4 User Roaming Since the new concept may support branch concepts a user may roam between several Sites of a branch The term user roaming does not only restrict to DECT roaming It is also extended to the SIP roaming of the user since each Site or a specific Media Gateway inside a site may have its own PBX assigned To support DECT roaming of a user A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 29 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes DECT Roaming and Handover an appropriate Dect configuration ARI FPS has to be chosen for details refer to Section 5 28 4 MGW specific fundamentals for Roaming roaming has to be enabled for a specific MGW by means of configuration at the HPCIP Group MediaGW List A user is configured uniquely at the Media Gateway IWU To support the SIP roaming of a user between different PBX it is necessary that the global user configuration data is unique across all PBX of all site
83. 5 5 3 Support for G 729a SDP 2 ehh 206 5 6 Timezone Support i e SEL ee x poe ated er c s peed duh ela ens 206 5 7 SIP Survivability n iere RR ed hue aed ch Oe De e DE E pU 207 5 7 1 Support of Outbound Proxy 0 hrs 207 5 7 2 DNS Administration 0 00000 hrs 207 55 9 DNSISRM Lr sedet ett Se LAM M CSS ets s ud esu uu s LEA UI E cec 207 SrA Penalty BOX sers eed ebd ud ed des ab Ua ee ace V UHR UR ERE 4 ee e 208 5 7 5 SIP NOTIFY Message in Limited Mode 0 0000 cece eh 208 5 7 6 Detection of Failure of SIP Servers 0 00 ccc teen eee 209 1 0 1 Survivabilty Information 0 0 0 000 tte eee 210 5 8 Message Waiting Indication MWI 0 0 0 eae 211 5 8 1 Activation of VoiceMail by Call Forward 2 0 0 ce nen 211 5 8 1 1 Connecting to the VoiceMail BOX ilisssselsese eh 212 5 8 1 2 Retrieving the number of messages 0 0 0c eee 212 5 8 1 3 MWI LED Activation Deactivation llllseeeeee RR RII III 213 5 8 1 4 PBX specific MWI functionality llis RII 213 5 8 1 5 Technical Background Information 00 00 nh 214 5 9 Enhanced Display Information illie m 214 5 9 1 Technical Background Information lleleeeeeee eh 214 5 10 Distinctive Ringing eeen E E E EEE mem 214 5 10 1 Technical Background Information 1 0 0 0 0 0 cette 215 5 11 S Party Call Control BPCO 20 0 0 teen eee 216 5 11 1 Technical Background Information
84. 6 6 4 Installation of MOW ia aa aan a hh hne 252 6 6 5 Initial Setup of MGW IWU 2 hme 252 7 Troubleshooting FAQ i002 te c dl i ll ee ee eee eee eed ee uie 253 PA DEGT ot Soe eee SEL eee ene ae a lee pe duni eat aa d ER e dee ote Pah 253 7 1 1 BSIP Only Not Found Using Scan 2 2 0 tetas 253 7 1 2 Registration of Handset Not Successful 0 00a 253 7 1 3 Idle Display of Handset is Blinking llellleeleer III 253 7 1 4 Display Message Netzfehler Out of Order 0 2 e 254 7 1 5 Display Message No Location issssseeseeeee m eae 254 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 8 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Contents 7 1 6 Display Message No Roaming 0 000 cece tte rn 254 7 1 7 Display Message User deactivated 0 ttn eee 254 7 1 8 Display Message Roaming Overload 1 0 0 0 0 00 ete 254 BA npe Ecc 255 8 1 Configuration Hints for Web Browser ssssssa sasssa aaaea hh 255 9 1 1 Mozilla Eirefox esa cer eri Ea eb peg ORE EAR ORC a area E Da RA PUE d Y 255 8 1 2 Microsoft Internet Explorer 0 20 0 cee eee hn 255 9 2 LED Statesin acne s Geel ahd th Mee eee OA ree eei PU Eam du d ven debate E Oui oak a 257 9 9 Handset UL sio ce Oe Gina neta teh LER vex ee b Prk EATER C EE ODE S angie Os 258 8 3 1 Service Menu s seid i PRI EPRRXS enis Sac a coal toa aie E Pe Md PORE RE 258 9 3 2 Context Menus c4 eder ete ice videt ede tn creer iis m ee e hs 259 9 3 2
85. Air Master 1 Air Slave 1588 Master 1588 Master d External Handover between Sitecode FPS HPCIP V1R5 introduces three new system entity types e Media Gateway IWU a new physical entity e Media Gateway a new physical entity e Media Gateway Local a new logical entity for Server IWU and BSIP IWU e Site a new logical entity 2 2 1 Media Gateway IWU A Media Gateway IWU represents a new physical system entity The main task of the IWU process is to interconnect the SIP and Dect call legs This doesn t change for the new Media Gateway IWU As opposed to a tradi tional Server IWU or BSIP IWU the Layer3 communication is now separated by the network communication between the Media Gateway IWU and its Media Gateways due to the branch concept Similarly to a V1R4 IWU most configu ration of the whole System is accomplished and centralized at the Media Gateway IWU This enables a centralized configuration concept across all Media Gateways A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes System Entities 2 2 2 Media Gateway A Media Gateway represents a new physical system entity and introduces a new abstraction layer between the Interworking Unit IWU and the Basestation IP BSIP For a traditional IWU up to V1R4 the IWU process communicated directly with the BSIP as well as with the SIP PBX Therefore SIP connections as well as DECT connections we
86. BX 56 VoIP Infrastructure network 52 D Debug windows 73 Debugging Configuration 154 F Factory reset 23 Frame Program Info 81 G General objects 71 Group Configuration 123 H Hardware connect 46 prepare 46 N Network configuration 89 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Index P Password change 70 Q Quick start overview 45 R Radio frequency site survey 66 Register handsets 63 S Start system services 63 Status Configuration 159 Synchronisation implementation 66 System Update 82 T Troubleshooting 253 U Users Configuration 128 W WBM Login 69 WBM modes 67 WBM overview 67 267
87. Berlin 1 002 MGW B 002 MG 001 Bsip 002 MG 192168 100 50 Rasup Located on 102 001 MGWW Berlin 1 001 MGw B 001 MG 001 Bslp 001 MG 192 168 100 50 Rasup Located on 103 001 MGW Berlin 1 002 MGw B 002 MG 001 Bsip 002 MG 192168 100 50 Ras up Located on 104 001 MGWW Berlin 1 DO1 MGW B ss E 192 168 10050 Rasup No location 105 001 MGWW Berlin 1 DO1 MGW B ES 192 168 10050 Rasup No location 106 001 MGV _Berlin_1 001 MGW B 192 168 100 50 Ras up No location 1 2 3 4 5 6 Search Scope Column MSN Search String 0 Search Max Lines 50 Step Size 50 Search Scope MGW 001 MGVV_Berlin_1 Previous hide disabled users Cycle s 0 10 04 2014 11 17 44 inited L users with active calls only Refresh to now Clear Statistics users with dect location only Previous Home users only all users The two sub pages User Status and User Mibs deliver User specific information The lower frame contains user specific options which differ from the options on other subpages The two sub pages MGW Status and MGW Mibs deliver Media Gateway specific information The lower frame contains MGW specific options which differ from the options on other subpages The four sub pages Base Status Base Mibs Base 1588 and Base RSSI deliver Dect Base specific information The lower frame contains Base specific options which differ from th
88. Branch If this checkbox is activated a valid IP address has to be entered in the column Outbound Proxy This IP address will be used for the Layer 3 Signaling IP header If the Checkbox is deactivated the column Outbound Proxy will be ignored In this case the value of column SIP Server Id will be used for Layer 3 Signaling Outbound Proxy Configures the IP address of the SIP Outbound Proxy This IP address will be used for the Layer 3 Signaling IP header It shall be located in the IP Infrastructure network see Section 1 3 Network Concept At the IWU a corresponding IP Infrastructure address has to be confi gured Netmask Enter the netmask for the IP address for the Gateway here Default for Class C networks 255 255 255 0 4 6 2 Configuration Page SIP SIP Settings This subpage contains all parameters which are necessary for the specific SIP settings configuration of the PBX SIP SIP Settings SIP Settings Index Displayindex a Enabled Name Packet Size Dtmf Transport Prot Direct S Registration expiry Registration threshold 1 NN v OSV Berlin HQ 20 RTP TCP v 300 2 4 2 V OSB Munic OSV Be 20 RTP TCP v 300 2 5 3 v OSB Stuttgart OSV 20 RTP TCP v 300 2 2 4 y OSO Augsburg 20 RTP UDP 120 2 3 5 yj OSO Ulm 20 RTP UDP 120 2 The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages Except S
89. C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 43 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities 44 Object Affected Segment Object Required Action MGW IWU gt Network gt Table gt LDAP Server No Reboot of MGW IWU necessary MGW IWU gt Network gt Table gt Phonebook Server No Reboot of MGW IWU necessary MGW IWU gt Group gt Changes apply for new calls or for existing calls after the next CF and CW call establishment MGW IWU gt Group gt Changes apply for new calls or for existing calls after the next CF and CW call establishment MGW IWU gt Group gt Phonebook Prefix Changes may apply for established calls MGW IWU gt Group gt CPU and VM All calls are disconnected immediately since a reregister is needed If a reboot will be necessary after applying the changes a message box will appear offering the possibility to start the reboot Yes or suppress the reboot Cancel which will revert to edit mode A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 3 Quick Start 3 1 Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution The quick start chapter describes the initial operation of the HiPath Cordless IP System V1R5 for a first functional test including the necessary configuration In general the configuration steps fo
90. CAN the MGW at the MGW IWU is UDP based At MGW IWU the following services are needed http https SSH SNMP Syslog and LDAP all terminating at MGW IWU At MGW the following services are needed http SSH SNMP Mibs at MGW only for OS Each MGW Network has to be unique inside the whole system e Each MGW VoIP Network has to be unique inside the whole system e Same DECT Networks at different MGW are supported A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities The MGW IWU concept requires transparent IP connections between MGW and MGW IWU this is accomplished by using VPN e g Layer 3 ip tunnel via ipsec if needed hardware and concepts of VPN tunnels are not part of the concept and should rely on already existing strategies at UNIFY Each entity of Media Gateway IWU and Media Gateway solely needs a single Default gateway which handles all further routing to all other needed networks In a further step of specification it is planned to enable the configuration of separate ip routes 2 12 5 Dynamic Configuration Changes The system concept is designed to allow dynamic changes of settings without the restart of the system services or rebooting the system where technically possible Besides the already existing dynamic editing of user and Dect modules the concept will be enhanced to support dynamic editing of SIP Gateways Gr
91. CT network option VLAN Id at page DECT this option Please take account of the correlating VLAN configuration of the VoIP Infra structure network A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 107 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 4 7 2 Media Gateways MGW IWU For application mode MGW IWU the subpages are separated into two groups indicated by a spacer between the group subpages The subpages located in the first group left to the spacer display information about all Media Gateways The subpages in the second group right to the spacer display information about a specific Media Gateway which has to be selected using a dropdown at the bottom of the page HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe amp 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 122444 432 amp ic 1397 i HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY Media Gateways Media Gateways General General Index Enabled Name MGW Type MGWa Syslog Mac Addr Alive Ti V MGW Berlin 1 MGW 30 no Syslog 00 0c 29 05 a5 1c MGW Berlin 2 MGW 30 no Syslog 00 0c 29 a0 6c 43 MGW Ulm MGW 30 no Syslog 00 0c 29 32 f2 7c Delete Media Gateway Replace Media Gateway Edit Media Gateway MGW Signal Listen Port MGW Control Listen Port Hint Adding editing and deleting of Media
92. D 1 1 n n 2 14 0 eee 193 5 1 8 SNMP MIB Tree MGW IWU mode Root OID 3 0 0 00 eee 193 5 1 8 1 mgwStatistics Version Root OlD 3 1 1 2 0 eee 193 5 1 8 2 mgwStatistics nn Root OID 3 1 n n 2 14 oaoa cee 194 5 1 9 SNMP Trap Tree MGW IWU mode Root OID 4 0 0000 ee 195 5 1 9 1 trMgwControlOnlineState Root OID 4 1 2 2 0 eee 195 5 1 9 2 trMgwSignalOnlineState Root OlD 4 2 0 0 0 eee 195 5 1 9 3 trMgwOvl100 Root OlD 4 3 0 0 0 0 rh 196 5 2 DAG CE 197 5 2 1 Implementation Detail for Deactivated DHCP 0 00 cee eee 197 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 6 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Contents 5 2 2 Implementation Detail for Activated DHCP 1 2 0 0 0 0 198 5 3 Ethernet Synchronization acc IEEE1588 0 0 00 eee 199 5 3 1 VLAN Configuration Example 0 00 c cect teen eee 200 5 4 Support for Different RTP Packet Sizes n 201 5 4 1 Implementation for Incoming Calls towards IP DECT 02 000 eee eee ee 201 5 4 2 Implementation for Outgoing Calls from IP DECT 0000 cece eee 201 5 4 3 Restrictions user eg gerer debate e Y X gas e E a io o ated Haan Ve eon ir Md 202 5 5 Codec Q 729 45 Su SLE Ma sey E UC bik domi Se MARE Os ta ede setis C s cM eddie 202 5 521 General G 729 hints ir eT Ue eas We te i ee ile eet eds eph no 202 5 5 2 Call Control for G 729 Call Limiting BSIP IWU only llle 204
93. DIIDebug Capi amp plfDebug CapiDDebug CapiBDebug L3MgwlwuRouterDe OslnitDebug Console Listen Port Logfile Name C start Syslog Syslog Server Ip Level ox00000000 Ox00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 132759 3378ic 13972156796427ic 1397215 C lightscreen capture mo Pp DefaulttDebug DefaultDebugExt o o l Logfile Size Total Log Path All Logfile Size Download Logfiles Validation details Level 4 Clear Logfiles Download Corefiles On the page Debugging various Logging and Debugging functions may be activated Based on these functions potential problems regarding DECT VoIP or interworking functionality maybe isolated For the analysis of the Log files profound knowledge of VoIP and DECT connections is essential Therefore they are intended primarily for our support staff The sub pages Server wu Voip and Setupapplic differentiate the various parts of the Software for which Debugging may be activated They differentiate the names of the Software levels and the according Log file names You will get more detailed information from our support engineer when the activation of a Debug level is requested Activation deactivation of Logfiles and console settings except ip address of the Syslog server are taken in effect without the need to restart the system services A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Ad
94. DNS 1 System DNS 1 SNMP and LDAP A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU User At present this feature is needed only for the LDAP server configuration The option is needed to configure the username of a user which has access to the LDAP server For details refer to Section 5 14 5 LDAP information Password At present this feature is needed only for the LDAP server configuration The option is needed to configure the corresponding password to the configured User which has access to the LDAP server For details refer to Section 5 14 5 LDAP information Poll Timer At present this feature is needed only for the LDAP server configuration The option is needed to configure the polling cycle of the LDAP server in seconds which is used to detect an outage of the LDAP server For details refer to Section 5 14 5 LDAP information 4 5 3 Local Server This page holds the configuration for Local Server Local Servers provide specific services as NTP DNS SNMP and LDAP Local Servers are servers which are functional without assigning them to a specific Group in contrast to servers located on subpage Group Servers The following server types are configured on this subpage Server Type Remark System DNS Available types are SYSTEM DNS1 and SYSTEM DNS 2 Syslog This Syslog server is re
95. Display of the handset is updated by using a silence call which will occupy a DECT channel To suppress unneeded silence calls the Idle Display including MWI information is written only if necessary in the new version If a LOCATION change was signaled by the handset the idle display will only be refreshed by means of a silent call if the Display information has changed MWI state or Call Pickup Additionally the silence display is actualized automatically after the handset has been switched OFF Therefore the DETACH message of the DECT handset is taken into account If a DETACH was not detected by the IWU e g after removing the handsets battery or loss of radio the handsets display is NOT automatically actualized All handset displays are automatically also updated after starting the IWU services or changing the user configuration Edit User Hints To update the idle display manually simply open the service menu using the left navigation key at the handset once No outgoing or incoming call is necessary anymore e Ifthe Status Update for an idle display MWI Pickup Call fails it will be retried for a maximum of five times Anyway a refresh of the idle display may be enforced by invoking the service menu at the handset ALOCATION REQUEST of a handset will trigger a refresh of the Idle Display by means of a Silent Call to ensure valid display elements e g MWI status ach Silent Call triggers an ALERT INDICAT
96. Ena Name NumOf lp amp ddr Module Mac Addr 1 001 v BslplwuLocal 10 192 168 123 222 00 00 00 00 00 2 002 v Bslp Room 2 012 10 192 168 10 2 00 1a e8 21 b4 Enabled necessary Set to Enabled for usage within the HiPath Cordless IP system A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Name necessary Configure a descriptive name for the BSIP Change the preconfigured name of the BSIP e g to the name of the physical location it is designated for This name is only used for the internal configuration of the BSIP IpAddrModule necessary Configure an IP address for this BSIP inside the DECT network Hint The HPCIP System automatically suggests a valid IP address 6 At the WBM of the BSIP IWU switch to configuration page Dect Sync Dect Sync Ed MMNMEEEEEEEEEEEERNNeRNNNNN L Modul Ena Name Sync ParkSync1 ParkSync2 ParkSync3 1 001 v BslplwuLocal no n a n a n a 2 002 V BslpRoom 2 012 air 001 BsiplwuLocal nia nia 7 Select the newly created entry for BSIP Only and change the content of the following fields Sync necessary Set to air to synchronize the actual BSIP1 to another BSIP1 via air ParkSync1 necessary Select from the dropdown to which BSIP1 the selected BSIP1 should be synchronized to This configuration example uses Module 001 BSIPIWU Local as the sync master 8 Att
97. G729 at the handset changes the codec list from G711A G711U to G729ab G711A G711U Details regarding G 729 may be found in chapter 5 5 Codec G 729 SC Silence Compression Using this option determines if the silence compression feature of codec G 729 should be enabled G 729ab or disabled G 729a Details regarding Silence Compression for G 729 may be found in chapter 5 5 Codec G 729 4 9 4 Configuration Page User Dect This page contains the user configuration for DECT functions Msn DisplayName Comment HandsetType Ipui Park registered 00101 101 Sales 1 Sen 0047C043EB 101B2FC400 00102 102 Sales 2 Sen 0044503F03 101B2FC400 00103 103 Sales 3 Sen 0047C30935 101B2FC400 Note The columns Index Enabled Msn DisplayName and Comment are repeated on all sub pages A description of these parameters can be found in chapter 4 9 2 Configuration Page User User HandsetType For the supported handsets S3 SL3 S4 SL4 M2 and M3 this option has to be configured to Unify which is the default which enables the Unify PN CAP signaling mode Only in Unify mode the full functionality of handsets is available For other GAP compatible handsets Gap has to be selected Handsets regis tered with this option have a very limited system functionality Hint The HandsetType is set at time of registering the handset Therefore it has to be already configured correctly before the handset is registered
98. GMT 01 00 Ams v VLAN Id IP settings for IWU Ip Address Here you have to configure the IP address at which the IWU should be configured inside the VoIP Infrastructure NetworkNetwork in case of a BSIP IWU and Server IWU or inside the Media Gateway IWU network in case of MGW IWU This is also the IP address at which the IWU is accessible via WBM The factory default IP address is 192 168 2 1 This IP address may not be used for further configuration of the IWU Hint The configured IP address may NOT be located inside the DECT network For details refer to Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing Network Mask Enter the corresponding netmask for the IP address as configured above Default for Class C networks 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway Default Gateway for application mode MGW IWU All routing towards the Media Gateways have to be handled by the default gateway of the Media Gateway IWU network The ip address of the default gateway has to be entered here Default Gateway for application mode BSIP IWU or Server IWU If all other routing is done via a default gateway it can be configured here Alter natively a dedicated route may be configured using the settings Network desti nation Network Mask and Gateway as described below Important All BSIP1 devices must be located inside the same network segment and therefore MUST NOT be separated by layer 3 Routing devices Only Layer 2 switches are supported bet
99. Gateways gt CL Network This page displays the table of configured Media Gateways CL networks of all Media Gateways Media Gateways CL Network CL Network Index Enabled Name Use MU Network IpAddr Netmask VLAN Id Cos Value 1 v MGW Berlin 1 v 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 v MGW _Berlin_2 J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 V MGW Ulm vj 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The table contains the following columns Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name A unique name for the Media Gateway may be configured here e g Site Id the MGW is located and name of MG This name serves only for internal configu ration purposes but doesn t uniquely identify a MGW Use IWU network If this checkbox is enabled no specific configuration for the CL network will be assigned Instead the ip configuration of the MGW IWU network is used IpAddr If the checkbox Use IWU network is deactivated a separate IP address for the CL network may be configured here Netmask If the checkbox Use IWU network is deactivated a separate netmask for the IpAddr of the CL network may be configured here VLAN Id VLAN Id of the Media Gateway IWU network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan The corresponding VLAN Id according IEEE 802 1q for the Media Gateway CL network is configured here A
100. HCIP Media Server mode A new entity introduced in HPCIP V1R5 Handles and terminates physical call connections SIP and logical Dect calls Site A logical and geographical grouping of several Media Gateways to enable DECT Call Roaming and Handover between the Basestations of different Media Gateways belonging to the site Roaming Movement of a PP from one FP coverage area to another FP coverage area where the capabilities of the FPs enable the PP to make or receive calls in both areas Intracell Handover Seamless handover of a DECT physical channel on the same BSIP from one timeslot carrier combination to another Intercell Handover Seamless handover Dect Bearer handover of a DECT connection from one BSIP to another BSIP inside the same MGW MGW Handover Seamless handover Dect bearer handover of a DECT connection from one BSIP to another BSIP located at another MGW inside the same site A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Index A Administration 75 C Configuration 153 Configuration System 183 Configuration Dect 138 Configuration Page Dect About 151 Dect ARI 148 Dect Debug 153 Dect Device 142 Dect Sync 145 User Dect 136 User User 133 User VoiP 135 Configuration reference 67 Configure 47 BSIP1 for IWU mode 47 DECT network 54 60 Frame 78 Gateway 89 Network 89 users at the BSIP IWU 56 users at the P
101. ION and therefore the Roaming counter Status gt CallDect gt Roaming and the Incoming call counter Status CallDect Incoming calls for a user e The Idle Display will be actualized by a SWITCH ON event of the handset in former versions an incoming or outgoing call was necessary 5 24 System Startup Procedure During system start of the IWU the DECT modules will be brought ONLINE not until all Voip users are initialized This is necessary to ensure that each DECT user has its own DECT system PIN for ciphering configured During system start of the IWU the DECT modules will be brought ONLINE not until 30 seconds since System Stop This ensures that the handsets detected the offline event in that time period and send a LOCATION Request to the base stations A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 237 Feature Descriptions Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI 5 25 Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI Improved support for Dect devices To improve the support of and for DECT devices two functionalities are imple mented in the IWU of IP DECT 1 Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI 2 Improved support for 3rd party GAP devices 5 25 1 Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI There are two main issues with require the usage of an Assigned TPUI instead of a Default TPUI 1 Requirement of 3rd party devices The usage of a
102. IP Server Software IWU are located This network is solely used for the communication between the IWU BSIP IWU or Server IWU or the Media Gateway MGW and the BSIP Only No Ethernet Layer3 components e g Routers are allowed between components inside this network The factory default network address is 192 168 1 0 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 The preconfigured network address of the IWU inside the DECT network is 192 168 1 1 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 The IP addresses for this network segment may be apart from the excep tions in the next chapter configured freely 3 Media Gateway IWU network MGW IWU and MGW application mode This network hosts the communication between the MGW IWU and its assigned MGW s as well as the existing infrastructure components default Gateways Time server DNS server LDAP servers SNMP clients except the VoIP Gateway which is hosted in a separate network Media Gateway VoIP network The factory default network address is 192 168 2 0 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 The preconfigured IP address of the IWU in this network is 192 168 2 1 4 Media Gateway VoIP network MGW IWU and MGW application mode A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 12 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Introduction Network Concept This network is solely intended for communication between the Media Gateways and their assigned Voip Gateways PBX By default this network is bound to the sam
103. Ipui The IPUI International Portable User Identity of the Handset of the User is automatically recorded during the registration process A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU For details regarding the uniqueness of a PMID which is built by the IWU from the IPUI refer to Section 5 26 Validation for Uniqueness of PMID and TPUI A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 137 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 4 10 Dect Configuration IWU On the main configuration page Dect the Base Stations are configured This page contains the sub configuration pages Base Radio Sync ARI Call About and Debug HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe amp 192 168 100 80 htmljwbm_pro html session_id 132759 3378ic 13972156796427ic 1397215 C E lightscreen capturemo P A i HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY Dect Dect Base Module Enabled Name IpA amp ddr Module Mac Addr 009 vj CL 1 2 192 168 100 81 fe 02 c0 a8 64 51 001 v Bslp 2 001 192 168 2221 00 1 a e8 21 c4 f2 002 v Bslp 2 002 192 168 2222 0 1a e8 21 c5 2e 003 v CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 192 168 100 81 ff 00 cO a8 64 51 Delete Module Edit Module Replace Module Fw Downlo
104. LDAP mapping is based onto the following scheme 1 String in field Station Configuration Name doesn t contain a blank Name Station Config gt Last Name UC Config Example for Name JohnSmith UC gt First Name UC Last Name JohnSmith LDAP sn JohnSmith LDAP givenName n a LDAP gt cn JohnSmith LDAP gt DisplayName JohnSmith 2 String in field Station Configuration Name contains one blank Name Station Config gt First Name Last Name UC Config Example for Name John Smith UC First Name John UC Last Name Smith LDAP gt sn Smith LDAP givenName John LDAP gt cn Smith John LDAP gt displayName Smith John Depending on the configured user name the LDAP mapping should be adapted to avoid empty LDAP entries if LDAP field givenName is used for Name strings without a blank A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions LDAP Phonebook The following template takes this behaviour into account and uses two separate LDAP fields sn and givenName LDAP Server configuration The defaults credentials of the LDAP Server of OSMX see OSOMX WBM gt Expert Mode Open Directory Service Basic settings are User uid ldap dc web Password as configured at OSO MX These credentials have to be configured in the corresponding LDAP server entry under page WBM gt Network Gateway gt Servers g
105. MG 001 Bslp 001 MGWv 002 Bslp 19216810050 Ras up Connectedin 9 5 001 MGW 001 MG 002 Bslp 001 MGww 002 Bsip 192 168 100 50 Rasup Located on 001 MGW 001 MG 002 Bslp 001 MGWv 002 Bslp 19216810050 Rasup Alerting in o 001 MGW 192168 100 50 Ras up No location 001 MGW 192 168 100 50 Ras up No location 001 MGW 192 168 100 50 Ras up No location The columns of the table have the following meaning Index This field contains the unique absolute index number of the user inside the IWU The number is assigned by the IWU and cannot be changed Msn This field displays the configured MSN of the associated user DisplayName This field displays the DisplayName of the associated User Home MGW only for MGW IWU This field displays the index and name of the users Home MGW VOIP Loc on MGW only for MGW IWU This field displays the index of the MGW the VoIP call was last located on If no LOCATION of the handset is received or if the corresponding Dect handset has no roaming authorization at a specific MGW the users VOIP Location will be assigned at the corresponding HOME MGW Dect Loc on MGW only for MGW IWU This field displays the number of the MGW the handset was last located on If a handset is switched off detached the value will be set to O Dect Loc on BS This field displays the number of the base Station the handset was last located on
106. MGW s inside the same site was estab lished for the current handset Ext MGW Roaming SIP only for MGW IWU This counter displays how often a External SIP roaming event change of a PBX associated to one MG to another PBX associated to another MGW was estab lished for the current handset Ext SITE Roaming only for MGW IWU This counter displays how often a External Site roaming event change of a Base Station without an active connection from one MGW to another which are located at different sites was established for the current handset A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 4 12 3 Pages MGW Status gt MGW Mibs MGW IWU only These two pages contain the status as well as the corresponding Mibs counters for the MGW s These sites are available only at a MGW IWU The MGW states are displayed at sub page MGW Status The MGW Mibs counters are displayed at sub page MGW Mib 4 12 3 1 Options at Lower Frame Cycle s 0 from 10 04 2014 11 17 44 inited Refresh to now Clear Statistics Previous For details of the lower panel containing further display options refer to Section 4 12 1 General Status Information 4 12 3 2 Configuration Page Status gt MGW Status Left part of table Status MGW Status Index DisplayIndex Name Site SiteSubld Control Online Signal Online SIP Reg All DECT Loc All Roami
107. Option Setting Storage Select an appropriate destination storage depending on your ESXi Configuration Virtual disk size 250 GB Virtual device node SCSI 0 0 0 IDE 0 0 Hint Important IDE has to be used Virtual Disk Size 250 GB A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 251 Configuration Techniques Installation of MGW IWU system 252 6 6 3 Installation of MGW IWU Follow the necessary steps for a Base installation of the IWU onto a hardware based server see Section 6 6 1 Base installation onto Server Rx 100 S8 a virtualized environment see Section 6 6 2 Base installation MGW IWU virtualized onto ESXi The HPCIP server software is now operating in Server IWU mode At this point the WBM is accessible via a maintenance PC attached to the same network Login via the maintenance PC to the WBM and switch the application mode to MGW IWU and reboot the currently running Server IWU After reboot the virtual machine works in MGW IWU mode 6 6 4 Installation of MGW Follow the necessary steps for a Base installation of the IWU onto a hardware based server see Section 6 6 1 Base installation onto Server Rx 100 S8 The HPCIP server software is now operating in Server IWU mode At this point the WBM is accessible via a maintenance PC attached to the same network Login via the maintenance PC to the WBM and switch the application
108. P some further restrictions may apply For details refer to Section 6 2 1 Scanning of BSIP V1R1 with IWU V1R2 and newer 7 1 2 Registration of Handset Not Successful The PIN configured for the IWU differs from the PIN entered at the Handset Did you mistype The handset has no radio connection to the Base Station too far away etc Are all activated Base Station in state Online and InSync except the Base Station which is the Synchronization masters 7 1 3 Idle Display of Handset is Blinking The following causes may apply the handset is outside the DECT coverage A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 253 Troubleshooting FAQ DECT 254 e the handset has no DECT registration at the BSIP at the handset the wrong base is selected or e the system services are not running 7 1 4 Display Message Netzfehler Out of Order The RAS registration from the handset at the PBX is down see Status Calls Dect Voip states This situation may exist for a short period of time in a HCIP Large Setup if the handset changes its location to another MGW Dect roaming This triggers a SIP roaming process at which the handsets SIP registration is removed from the previous MGW to the new MGW 7 1 5 Display Message No Location The handset couldn t establish a Dect Location at the HCIP 7 1 6 Display Message No Roaming In a large HCIP setup the assigned group of th
109. P Server Software Therefore the term BSIP IWU is used as a synonym for a BSIP1 which is running the HiPath Cordless IP Server Software IWU The term HPCIP IWU or short IWU is used as a synonym for the Inter Working Unit process of the HPCIP system The IWU may physically run on a BSIP BSIP IWU a Rx 100 S8 Server IWU or MGW IWU or virtualized on an ESX session as Media Gateway IWU MGW IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 11 Introduction Network Concept 1 3 Network Concept The IP network concept of the HiPath Cordless IP solution System is designed for the separation into several logical networks 1 VolP Infrastructure network Server IWU and BSIP IWU application mode Here the existing infrastructure components default Gateways DHCP servers Time server DNS server LDAP servers SNMP clients the PBX the VoIP Gateway and the BSIP1 or the server which is running the HiPath Cordless IP Server Software the Interworking Unit I WU between VoIP and DECT are located This network is used for the connection of the IWU to the IP and VoIP infrastructure of the company LAN The factory default network address is 192 168 2 0 with a netmask of 255 255 255 0 The preconfigured IP address of the IWU in this network is 192 168 2 1 2 DECT network all application modes Here all BSIP1 Only Base Stations and the BSIP IWU or the server running the HiPath Cordless
110. Radio Advanced mode 00 cece eee eee ee 143 4 10 4 Configuration Page Dect Sync 0 teens 145 4 10 5 Configuration Page Dect ARI 0 2 2 0 etna 148 4 10 6 Configuration Page Dect Call Advanced mode 0000 cece eee eee 150 4 10 7 Configuration Page Dect About 1 2 00 tenes 151 4 10 8 Configuration Page Dect Debug Advanced mode 0 0c eee eee 153 4 11 Debugging Configuration IWU 000 mrs 154 4 12 Status Configuration IWU ssssssssessel s m rs 159 4 12 1 General Status Information l liiiielilselseesee 160 4 12 2 Configuration Pages Status gt User Status and User Mibs lllllileels elles 161 4 12 2 1 Status Search Options lisiilliiseleeseee ln 161 4 12 2 2 Configuration Page Status gt User Status lille eere 163 4 12 2 3 Configuration Page Status gt User Mibs 2 0 0 0 0c cee 165 4 12 3 Pages MGW Status gt MGW Mibs MGW IWU only lssssslss III 167 4 12 3 1 Options at Lower Frame 0 0 00 ccc teeta 167 4 12 3 2 Configuration Page Status gt MGW Status 0 000 00 eee 167 4 12 3 3 Configuration Page Status gt MGW Mibs 200 0000 eee 170 4 12 4 Pages Base Status Mibs 1588 RSSI 0 eens 173 4 12 4 1 Options at Lower Frame 0 0 00 ccc tees 173 4 12 4 2 Page Base Status 0 teens 173 4 12 43 Page Base MIDS coe Deep CER hel
111. Resource Counter 0 0 0 lh rr 34 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 3 Contents 2 10 2 Streamvz ce eel ek iw npo Sg es hoe PIS SER ea yee Be eee ee 34 2 11 Installation Process uis creber DA ee et ee E a ee See ee ae ets Oa TR agate eo 36 2 11 1 Initial Setup of Media Gateway 0 0 rn 36 2311 2 Update Goricepts i o ot Lm ERR v ng oy en A Er RE Eq re IRR RUNI Re ea a 37 2 11 2 1 Update from VIRE ereire e e a hh rn 37 2 11 3 Lice nsirig aso sos epu he te RG Etats DEL a Vent Ce OEE PEU EIN RAE MER CERE RS 37 2 11 4 Process Names 2 2 2 2 a ele m hh hh 38 2 12 Details to System Entities 0 0 00 hrs 38 2 12 1 Media Gateway IWU isussulsslselee eh rh 38 2 12 2 Media Gateway ssssssslsseeeelll ehh nne 38 2 12 2 1 Synchronization between MGW inside the same Site liliis cece eee 39 2 12 2 2 Limitation of calls at 1588 master base illii eee 41 2 12 2 3 Max no of BSIP per MGW lsussslselel hr 41 2 12 3 Reguirements rues c ER epe se A edet oe Gis elei PE MOM ORE Cee EE 42 2 12 4 Network Communication Concept ls hs 42 2 12 4 1 General Requirement VPN iisussesselesee ehh 42 2 12 4 2 Communication Concept isisussseselesee ete 42 2 12 5 Dynamic Configuration Changes 2 2 2 0 ccc cette eae 43 3 Quick Start eh eet ee ai yx x E VR ae kee TENE RE NR NN TR E ERES RR 45 3 1 Quick Start Sm
112. SRV record settings SIP Survivability Survivability Index Displayindex a Enabled Mame DNS SRY DNS 1 DNS 2 v OSY Berlin HO v 002 SR V LOC DNS SYS1 006 SRV LOC DNS SYS2 v OSB Munic OSV Be 7 002 SRV LOC DNS SYS1 006 SRV LOC DNS SYS2 v OSB Stuttgart OSY T 002 SR V LOC DNS SYS1 006 SR V LOC DNS SYS2 T El OSO Augsburg 002 SRV LOC DNS SYS1 006 SRV LOC DNS SYS2 v OSO Ulm 002 SRF V LOC DNS SYS1 006 SRV_LOC_DNS_SYS2 oni ni Aa a gy 4 C Na The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages Except Servers A description of these parameters may be found in the previous chapter DNS SRV Controls the usage of DNS Service Records For detail refer to Section 5 7 3 DNS SRV If the checkbox DNS SRV is activated the columns Outbound Proxy and ListenPort Remote will be ignored for this gateway The SIP Server addresses are now derived by DNS SRV requests Therefore the column SIP Server Id must contain a valid domain name The DNS request will be repeated hourly If the checkbox DNS SRV is deactivated the columns Outbound Proxy and ListenPort Remote will be used for this gateway A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 102 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration The maximum number of SIP Se
113. Status The user Mibs counters are displayed at sub page User Mibs 4 12 2 1 Status Search Options The lower panel contains two panels The upper panel contains the search functionality the lower panel contains further display options A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 161 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Search Scope Column MSN Search Scope MGW 001 MGW Berlin 1 hide disabled users users with active calls only users with dect location only Home users only all users 162 v Search String 0 Search Max Lines 50 Step Size 50 v Previous Next Cycle fs 0 From 10 04 2014 11 17 44 inited Refresh to now Clear Statistics Previous For details of the upper panel containing the search functionality refer to Section 5 27 User Search Options V1R5 For details of the lower panel containing further display options refer to Section 4 12 1 General Status Information A specific user may be searched using the search functionality Additionally to the user specific search scope the search may be limited to a specific Media Gateway which may be selected additionally f a specific MGW is selected in contrast to the All entry the user will be displayed only if the selected MGW is the Home MGW of the user or its current SIP location is located at this MGW Further options which are available on th
114. System Limits Item Limit V1R5 Step 1 Max no of MGW MGW IWU 20 100 see 1 Max no of Sites MGW IWU 20 100 see 1 Max no of BSIP Site up to 568 see 2 Max no of MGW Site 5 Max no of BSIP MGW 120 see 2 Max no of concurrent calls MGW 30 30 Max no of concurrent calls MGW 60 60 Max no of concurrent calls MGW 90 90 Max no of concurrent calls MGW 120 120 Max no of concurrent calls Site 600 Max no of concurrent calls MGW IWU 3000 Max no of users MGW 1200 Max no of users MGW IWU 20000 Max no of PBX MGW IWU 100 Max no of LDAP server MGW IWU 10 Calculated max values Max no of BSIP Site Max no of BSIP MGW max no of MGW Site 120 5 600 Max no of BSIP MGW IWU Max no of MGW MGW IWU max no of BSIP MGW 100 120 12000 Max no of concurrent calls Site Max no of concurrent calls MGW 120 Max no of MGW Site 120 5 600 1 Up to 100 if 1 MGW Site used up to 20 if 5 MGW Site are used The number is limited by the Resource Counter which may not exceed 200 For details refer to next chapter A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 33 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Definitions 2 10 Definitions 34 2 Since MGW inside a site are synced via air each MGW inside this site has to be configured with up to two virt
115. To 14 3 R String mgwMgwIndex 14 4 R String mgwMAC 14 5 R String mgwName 14 6 R String mgwOVL70 14 7 R String mgwOVL100 14 8 mgwTraps 4 trMgwControlOnlineState 1 trMgwSignalOnlineState 2 trMgwOvl100 3 trMgw 4 R String trMgwIndex 1 R String trMgwMAC 2 R String trMgwName 3 R String trMgwEvent 4 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 192 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SNMP 5 1 7 SNMP MIB Tree MGW IWU mode Root OID 1 The Root OID is assigned the OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 36378 5 1 7 1 bsipStatistics Version Root OID 1 1 1 This value Integer has to be queried by a SNMP manager to resetthe MgwIndex to 0 The Index for the MGW may be incremented by querying the bsipStatistics Mgwlndex value see below The SNMP object name is bsipStatistics Version the OID is Root OID 1 1 1 5 1 7 2 bsipStatistics MgwlIndex Root OID 1 1 2 This MIB has a dual purpose function This value Integer has to be queried by a SNMP manager to increment the MGW index and initiates a wrap around of the index if necessary and to refresh the content of the IWU counters into the SNMP counter tables The SNMP object name is bsipStatistics Mgwindex the OID is Root OID 1 1 2 5 1 7 3 bsipStatistics nn Root OID 1 1 n nz2 14 These MIB are identical to the MIB described in Se
116. U 166 Outgoing calls This counter displays the number of outgoing connections from direction handset gt BSIP gt PBX which have been signaled for the User Intracell handover This counter displays how often an Intracell handover transfer of a channel within the same Base Station was detected for the User Intercell handover This counter displays how often an Intercell handover transfer of a channel between different Base Stations was detected for the User External handover only for MGW IWU This counter displays how often an External handover transfer of a channel between different Media Gateways was detected for the User Internal Roaming This counter displays how often a roaming event change of a Base Station without an active connection between MGW s inside the same site was estab lished for the current handset Hints Handover events Intercell handover during an active call are not considered by this counter These events are handles by counter Intercell handover e Ifa user entry is disabled and the handset has a valid subscription the handsets initiates a LOCATION Request cyclically about 90 sec This LOCATION REQUESTS are counted to the ROAMING counter of the module and not for the user Stats gt Calls Dect since the user is disabled Ext MGW Roaming DECT only for MGW IWU This counter displays how often a roaming event change of a Base Station without an active connection between
117. U processes are displayed Stopped Started or Running Up since Displays the time the service was started lastt Service Usually both services are activated which means that the corresponding process is started automatically after rebooting the BSIP A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 184 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference CLC Configuration Server IWU MGW IWU 4 14 CLC Configuration Server IWU MGW IWU If a Server based IWU for application type Server IWU or MGW IWU is used a specific license is needed Without a valid license the HPCIP System will be not functional Hint The MAC address of the SERVER may be found in the output of Version System on WBM page Administration HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe e 192 168 100 80 html wbm pro html session id 132759 3378 HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G product name HiPath Cordless IP v1 HiPath Cordless IP v1 Use local CLA Remote CLA Ip available licenses 100 12000 used licenses 100 12000 feature name Server Basestation Refresh Load License xic 13972156796427ic 1397215 t ej Oly Bly e 7 lightscreen capture mo P 4 Status grace period 7 days left grace period 7 days left The columns of the table have the following meaning product name T
118. X gt BSIP gt handset has been signaled This counter is also incremented for calls where the connection was not successfully established or for location calls of a handset If a handset paging was unsuccessfully e g not reachable outside DECT area this call is counted to the Incoming calls of the User ExtHO Cnt This counter displays how often an External handover transfer of a channel between the BSIP of different Media Gateways was established Intracell handover This counter displays how often an Intracell handover handover of a DECT channel within the same DECT Base Station was detected at the BSIP Intercell handover This counter displays how often an Intercell handover handover of a channel between different DECT Base Stations was detected at the BSIP Roaming This counter displays how often a roaming event change of a Base Station without an active connection was detected at the BSIP Hints Handover events Intercell handover during an active call are not considered by this counter These events are handles by counter Intercell handover Ifa user entry is disabled and the handset has a valid subscription the handsets initiates a LOCATION Request cyclically about 90 sec This LOCATION REQUESTS are counted to the ROAMING counter of the module and not for the user Stats gt Calls Dect since the user is disabled Ovi 70 This counter displays how often the BSIP has allocated equal or more
119. _pro html session_id 010351 4508 amp ic 13972084700997ic 1397208470 _ HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G BsipOnly BsIpOnly Program Info Active System Version System Update System 1 Reboot Board Version System 2 Applic Mode IWU Factory Setting Network State The configuration options are described at chapter 4 3 Administration IWU The following options differ from the options of a BSIP IWU Switch Applic Mode To change the mode of the BSIP1 between BSIP Only to BSIP IWU select Switch Applic Mode Hints The current working mode is printed out at the bottom status line APPLICTYPE BSIPONLY or BSIPIWU and in the output of Network State The process of switching from BSIPONLY to IWU mode may take several minutes After changing the application mode the following message box will appear A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 75 Configuration reference Administration BSIP Only e Switching to IWU mode and reboot Click on OK to reboot the BSIP Only into operation mode BSIP IWU Important note After switching the Applic mode to BSIP IWU the BSIP will obtain the IP configuration which was active the last time it was active in BSIP IWU mode This may be the default factory IP configuration for BSIP IWU mode 192 168 2 1 or another altered IP configuration The output of the Network State displays the IP configuratio
120. a simple CSV file is used to generate a central phonebook on the IWU The entries of that phonebook are accessible in the same way as the LDAP directory In contrast to the LDAP phonebook which is used for outgoing calls solely the system phonebook is also used to look up names during incoming calls and to display them on the handset The configuration of the system phonebook is accomplished on a group specific base at the WBM WBM gt Group gt PB Phonebook Enabled WBM gt Group gt Phonebook Prefix WBM gt User gt Load Phonebook If option PB Phonebook Enabled is enabled the system phonebook is generally available for the group users and the corresponding handset menu Phonebook will be displayed in the handsets service menu To load the phonebook into the IWU by means of a csv file this may be accom plished using the button Load Phonebook Hints A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions System Phonebook e The System phonebook file is NOT stored in the backup file of the IWU due to the dynamic nature of phonebook changes e Depending on the data source the System Phonebook is derived from the Phone Numbers included may or may not contain a Dial Prefix to dial the PSTN If the Phone Numbers don t include the Dial Prefix a Dial Prefix may be added by using the corresponding configuration option Group Phone bookPrefix e The System P
121. ablished Signal Online This field displays the current state Online or Offline of the Media Gateway Signaling connection Online if services are running and communication to MGW IWU via the SIGNALING connection is established SIP Reg All This field displays the current number of active SIP registrations at the current MGW including SIP Home registrations and roamed registrations DECT Loc All This field displays the current number of active Dect locations at the current MGW Roaming To This field displays the current number of active roamings from the Home MGW to another MGW Roaming From This field displays the current number of active roamings from the Home MGW to the current MGW Calls This field displays the number of current DECT calls of all bases belonging to the MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU CCx x 1 5 This field displays the current state of Cross Connects via the Cross Link network from the current MGW identified by Site SiteSubld to another MGW identified by value x inside the same site Following states for Cross connect are defined Online Cross connect to MGW active Offline Cross connect to MGW inactive X Cross connect not applicable since CCx SiteSubld of Current MGW Empty string No Cross connect configured ExtHOx x 1 5 This field displays the cu
122. ad Media Gateways 002 MG Berlin 2 No new modules on scan o The configuration page Dect is divided into two parts In the table view at the top all BSIP1 modules specific to a MGW base are confi gured At the bottom of the page the DECT Management is accomplished A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 138 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 4 10 1 General DECT Configuration At the bottom of the page general DECT management of DECT modules as well as the selection of a specific MGW is accomplished HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 html wbm pro html session id 132759 3378ic13972156796427ic 1397215 e B lightscreen captuemo A 7 Wr H i HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY Module Enabled Name Ip amp ddr Module Mac Addr 009 v CL 1 2 192 168 100 81 fe 02 c0 a8 54 51 001 j Bslp 2 001 192 168 2221 00 1a 68 21 c4 f2 002 Bslp 2 002 192 158 2222 00 1a 88 21 c5 2e 003 CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 192 168 100 81 ff 00 c0 a8 54 51 Delete Module Edit Module Replace Module Fw Download Media Gateways 002 MGW Berlin 2 No new modules on scan o 4 10 1 1 Adding Deleting and Scanning Delete Module By selecting a base station and clicking on Delete Module the selected Base Station entry
123. address inside the range of 192 168 0 0 and assign a network mask of 255 255 0 0 but remember that the temporarily DECT network can t overlap with the Infrastructure network Apply the changes SYNC the Base stations and reboot the system If applicable do a further update into Partition 2 since all factory delivered BSIP are active in System partition 2 After a SCAN the newly added BSIP are displayed on page Dect Configure the necessary settings SYNC the newly added base stations and reboot into the updated partition If all BSIP are in the desired state ONLINEZYES see page Status initiate a firmware update with V1R4 After reboot revert to the former DECT network parameters SYNC and reboot the system A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration Techniques Multi Register Bulk Registering of Handsets 6 3 Multi Register Bulk Registering of Handsets The multi register feature eases the configuration process if registering a large amount of users remarkably Adding a large amount of users in V1R1 required a lot of manual configuration and intervention of the administrator Firstly all users have to be added and configured inside the WBM Afterwards while registering the handsets the correct user entry has to be located and marked and then regis tering both at the WBM and at the handset has to be initiated The new bulk regis tration process now simplifies these processes by auto a
124. advanced configuration mode This new function is mainly intended for testing purposes in a lab environment with a lot of different Base stations for different HPCIP systems Normally all modules are scanned and each entry is added at the DECT modules table Activating this option the SCAN functionality doesn t add new entries of Base station into the table A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 141 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 142 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base On this page the properties of the Base Station connections are configured Dect Base Index Module Enabled Name IpAddr Module Mac Addr 2 009 v CL 1 2 192 168 100 81 fe 02 c0 a8 54 51 5 001 v Bslp 2 001 192 168 2224 00 1 a e8 21 c4 f2 6 002 v Bslp 2 002 192 168 222 2 00 1a e8 21 c5 2e 7 003 v CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 192 168 100 81 ff 00 cO a8 64 51 The columns of the configuration table have the following meaning Index This field contains the absolute resp global index number of the DECT module BSIP This number identifies a BSIP on a specific IWU globally and independent from the assigned MGW The number is assigned by the IWU and cannot be changed Module Number MGW This field contains the relative index number of the DECT module BSIP at a specific MGW The number may be changed manually This uniqueness of this number inside a Media Gateway is also considered for disabled
125. al Index Displayl Enabled Name Gateway Type ListenPortRem SIP Server Id Resolve Use OBP Outbound Proxy Netmask 1 1 v OSV Berlin HQ OSY 5060 pbx1 dnszone2 v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 4 2 v OSB Munic OSV Be OSV 5060 pbx1 dnszone2 v v 172 32101 255 255 255 0 5 3 v OSB Stuttgart OSV OSY 5060 pbx1 dnszone2 Vv v 172 3211 1 255 255 255 0 2 4 Iv OSO Augsburg oso 5060 172 31 244 1 v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 3 5 v OSO Ulm oso 5060 192 168 100 50 v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 General Gateway configuration Hints To add a new entry for a gateway click on Add Gateway A new entry line with default values is appended which have to be modified according to your System needs The new entry line is either inserted above the selected Gateway or inserted at the top of the list if no Gateway is selected e A selected Gateway entry may be deleted by clicking Delete Gateway During running system service the gateway may be edited by using the Edit Gateway button The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Index This new column displays the index of the current PBX or server DisplayIndex The Display Index of the entry is displayed here This value is automatically incre mented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Gateway the PBX is added to the configuration and can be selected when configuring the Groups later on Name Enter a unique name
126. alidation for Uniqueness of PMID and TPUI 5 26 Validation for Uniqueness of PMID and TPUI The last 16 bits of the IPUI will be used to build the PMID This PMID is not unique if two handsets have the same value in the last 16 bits resp 2 bytes or 4 digits of the IPUI Multiple same PMID s will lead to call disruptions in several call scenarios Therefore the PMID s as well as the TPUI will be checked during the Register the Multi Register process and after updating to this version The Detection of same PMID s or same TPUI will trigger a validation Warning or ERROR depending on the Default TPUI setting and the type of uniqueness TPUI or PMID TPUI setting PMID differ IPUI differ Default TPUI enabled Validation ERROR Validation ERROR Default TPUI mode Default TPUI disabled Validation WARNING Validation ERROR Assigned TPUI mode 5 27 User Search Options V1R5 Due to the high amount of users which may be configured at a MGW IWU up to 20000 itis neither technically possible nor practically recommended due to long load times to display a table inside the WBM with e g 20000 rows Therefore for display issues at the WBM the whole table with all entries is separated into several sub tables with a configurable number of lines per sub table which will facilitate to step through all entries on a sub table base To minimize the time for finding a specific user entry search functionality is
127. all 1588 slaves may be changed by this procedure Therefore it is suggested to use a BSIP as the new module which is attached at the same switch as the failing 1588 sync master to ensure consistent sync topology and avoid a higher number of switch hops Procedures Edit the designated new 1588 master disable it and apply the changes e Select the entry of the module which served as 1588 sync master old module and press Replace module Now enter the Index number of the new module which should become the new 1588 Sync master A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Wan Download The values of the new entry will be replaced with the values of the old module PARK MAC Serial Ip address The old entry which was designated for the old module will be deleted in the list of modules Important note After the process of replace module has finished the new module will have the same ip address as the old module If the old module is already attached to the network it has to be detached immediately to avoid the same ip address which definitively will lead to temporarily or constant malfunction of the system especially if the module was configured as 1588 master 5 21 Wan Download Starting with version V1R4 downloading a firmware image over a WAN link is supported In earlier versions the download timed out after a period of time and therefore updating over WAN was
128. all Solution Server Solution llli es 45 3 1 1 Quick start overview l lssllsssseeseee ehh rre 45 9 1 2 Example Config ratioris cu ue gates ELE RR Rr Yeu le ha GR RU UREPRRERUEMOSE PER Can rd 46 3 1 3 Prepare and Connect Hardware 0 0c cc rn 46 3 1 3 1 HPCIP BSIP SmallSolution 22 oe ER ecurFi xe Rr a TAE Peis phos beet neeeas 46 3 1 3 2 HPCIP Server Server Solution 0 000 cect tenes 47 3 1 4 Configure BSIP Server for IWU mode 0 000s 47 3 1 4 1 HPCIP BSIP Small Solution lllseesssseeeseee eh 47 3 1 4 2 HPCIP Server Server Solution 000 0c cee teens 50 3 1 5 Configuration of VoIP Infrastructure network lslsslssslsle eh 52 3 1 6 Configuration of DECT network sasaaa aaan ehh 54 3 1 7 Configuration of users at the PBX 1 0 ccc rn 56 3 1 8 Configuration of users at the BSIP IWU 0 0 0 0 teenies 56 3 1 8 1 Gateway and Group 1 0 hm 56 3 1 8 2 USGt s ee gas Pees Made paese NM S Baugh fea HERUM PE eR ea atten Beara 58 3 1 9 Configure further BSIP Only to the system 000 c cette 60 3 1 10 Start system services and register handsets 0 0c eee eee eens 63 3 1 10 1 Start system ServiceS 1 2 eet 63 3 1 10 2 Register handsets as seg rera x Reader x eno Paw eeu a Pale hea ag CN Rx 64 3 1 11 Quick Start Completion 0 0 0 0000 hh 66 3 2 Quick Start MGW IWU System s aaa ana e den aa A a hh
129. all is an incoming call towards the A party The A party has to accept this call and afterwards the call direction turns into an outgoing call 5 13 3 Call description The calling to another subscriber was not successfully finished The A user activates the Callback feature by pressing the Callback soft key and afterwards the Call back in the service menu Monitoring begins and the calling party hears a confirmation announcement depending on PBX that the request is received A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Call Completion CC If the called party did not answer the alerting call CCNR The called party becomes available for callback after initiating some activity on the device then transitioning to idle state As soon as the transition to the idle state occurs e g when the called party goes on hook the calling party is notified of the called party s availability and receives a recall with Display Information Call Completion and the name and number of the called party When the calling party answers a new call to the original destination is dialed automatically If the called party was busy CCBS The called party has no notification of the callback request As soon as the called party goes on hook the calling party is notified of the called party s availability and receives a recall with Display Information Call Completion and the name and
130. ame of the PBX to a descriptive name for the VoIP Gateway This name is only used for the internal configuration of the BSIP Software This configuration example uses the name OpenScape Office MX 3bx Gateway Type Change the preconfigured gateway type Default to the type of PBX used OSO or OSV If the PBX is not of type OSV or OSO use type default In this example an OpenScape Office MX is used therefore type OSO is configured SIP Server Id and Netmask Change the preconfigured SIP Server Id from 0 0 0 0 to the IP address of the used PBX as well as the corresponding Netmask to the IP address of your PBX This configuration example uses the IP address 192 168 201 94 and the network mask 255 255 255 0 6 Switch to configuration page Group Groups are the connecting link between the Gateways and the VoIP Users A User is assigned to a Group and a Group is assigned to a Gateway 7 Adda new group by clicking on the button Add Group Group Index Displayl Enabled Name Gateways LDAP Server Phonebook Server Phoneb InternC CF Call CW Cal VM Yoi VM Number oi CC Call 1 1 v default 001 OpenScape Offi no LDAP no Phonebook zi 8 Change the contents of the following fields Name Change the preconfigured name of the Group e g to the name of the corre sponding PBX This name is only used for the internal configuration of the BSIP Software This configuration example uses th
131. ames 1 6 3 Simultaneous WBM Sessions If you login onto the same WBM session on which another user is logged on you are informed about that by a message box There is another user logged in do you want to disconnect the currently logged in user OK will logout the currently connected user Cancel Go back to the Login dialog A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Introduction WBM related issues 1 6 4 Marking Changed Values Changed values are marked with a red triangle at the top left corner of the corre sponding field But you have to leave the current field for changes to come in effect via TAB key or mouse Enabled Msn DisplayName V 11 DISP 101 v 102 DISP 102 v 103 DISP 103 Please keep in mind that changes are not in effect immediately You have to apply the changes with the Apply button and for some changes you have to e restart the services or for some changes reboot the IWU Information which actions have to be taken to take the changes into effect will be described in the appropriate chapters 1 6 5 Tooltips for Column Headers of Tables All tables are equipped with tooltips for the column headers If the mouse cursor moves over the column header the tooltip is displayed which contains the same text as the column header caption itself This feature offers the possibility to keep the column width very small e g for counter values
132. aming Fro MGVV OVL70 MGW OVL100 BS OVL70 BS OVvL 100 ICs 170 Lem 0 0 0 Outgoing c 10 0 0 16 2 0 Site Sitesubld Contr 1A 12 2 0 4 0 2 2 2 MGW is enabled and P connection between MGW and MGW IWU both for Control and Config channel is established 4 12 3 3 Configuration Page Status gt MGW Mibs Left part of table olBootCnt Control OnlineCnt Signal BootCnt Signal OnlineCnt CC Online Cnt 1 CC Online Cnt 2 CC Online C CC Online CC Onli 3 2 4 0 4 0 0 0 3 2 4 4 0 0 0 0 3 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 Right part of table 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 The columns of the table have the following meaning Index This column displays the index of the current MGW This value is automatically incremented by the WBM DisplayIndex The Display Index of the entry is displayed here This value is automatically incre mented by the WBM Name Displays the name for the MGW as configured Site SiteSubld Displays the compound value of current Site Id and Site Subld as configured for the MGW to uniquely identify a Media Gateway inside a site Control BootCnt This counter displays how often the MGW Control connection was lost since the start of the system services of the MGW IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Control Online Cnt T
133. and PBX is established Therefore the WBM of the group differs slightly Where not other stated the files belong to both types of application modes A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 123 Configuration reference Group Configuration IWU Group The lower panel contains buttons for the group management 4 8 1 General Group Configuration Hint Adding editing and deleting of group entries is supported during running System services 1 To add a new Group entry click on Add Group A new entry line with default values is appended which have to be modified according to your System The values have to be configured according your needs The new entry line is either inserted above the selected Group or inserted at the top of the list if no Group is selected 2 A selected Group entry may be deleted by clicking Delete Group 3 To edit a Group entry during running system services select the entry and click on Edit Group The Configuration of the selected Group may be edited now After all changes to the group are initiated click on Apply to bring the changes into effect 4 8 2 Configuration Page Group Index Displayindex a Enabled Name 3 2 4 124 4 2 3 IS S S OSV Branches OSV Headquar Grp Ulm OSO MediaGv List HomeMediaGvV Index Phonebook Prefix InternCalllen CF CallForward Enabled CVV CallVaiting Enabled 123 001 MG Berlin 1
134. and therefore place all columns fitting on one screen without the need of scrolling horizontally In this case the column header caption may be truncated on the right side but the column header caption may be derived by simply moving the mouse cursor over the column header to retrieve the description of the current column VOIP DECT DECT DECT DECK VOPIP 003 003 032 003 1032 DECT CallonBS D03 003 032 003 032 19216820194 003 003 032 003 032 192 168 201 94 003 003 032 003 032 192168201 94 002 002 017 002 017 192 168 201 94 001 001 004 001 004 192168201 94 A AAD 20 20 Ai x A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 19 Introduction WBM related issues 20 1 6 6 Sorting of Tables All tables may be sorted Ascending or Descending by either double clicking the column header or by left clicking of the arrow in the right area of the column header Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment 1 v 101 g Sort Ascending SL1 004 2 z 192 zi Sort Descending SLI n 3 v 103 Dr5r TU SL1 004 4 104 DISP 104 SL1 004 e Hint Sort properties are not stored After a change of pages the original sort order is restored 1 6 7 Drag and Drop Support Besides the standard mechanism of sorting user entries by clicking the column headers
135. and with an ip address of 192 168 2 1 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Administration IWU Applic Mode MGW IWU only available in Server IWU and MGW WBM To change the application mode of the Server platform from Server IWU or MGW to MGW IWU select Applic Mode MGW IWU After changing the application mode the following message box will appear Press OK to reboot the Server and start it in the other application mode or Cancel to stop the reboot process Changing this application mode will initiate a factory reset to the corresponding application mode After reboot the server will start in application mode MGW IWU and with an ip address of 192 168 2 1 Applic Mode MGW only available in Server IWU and MGW IWU WBM To change the application mode of the Server platform from Server IWU or MGW IWU to MGW select Applic Mode MGW After changing the application mode the following message box will appear Press OK to reboot the Server and start it in the other application mode or Cancel to stop the reboot process Changing this application mode will initiate a factory reset to the corresponding application mode After reboot the server will start in application mode MGW IWU and with an ip address of 192 168 2 1 Factory setting Using this functionality a factory reset may be initiated which deletes all confi gured data BSIP platform
136. are stored on the BSIP1 Download logfiles With this Button all Logfiles of the BSIP may be downloaded and stored on the file system of the maintenance PC After clicking on the button Download logfiles an browser based file open dialog will be displayed immediately ffnen von logfiles tez Sie m chten Folgende Datei herunterladen d logfiles tgz Vom Typ Winzip Datei Von https 192 168 201 114 Wie soll Firefox mit dieser Datei verfahren ffnen mit WinZip Standard Auf Diskette Festplatte speichern C F r Dateien dieses Typs immer diese Aktion ausf hren You have to select the store method of the dialog click on button OK and select from the following save as dialog a folder to store the configuration files on the maintenance PC or a directory available via the network default logfiles tgz Bitte geben Sie den Dateinamen an unter dem die Datei gespeichert werden s JE Speichem in Configurations A dq iwu config taz 2 Zuletzt verwendete D Desktop Eigene Dateien Arbeitsplatz Metzwerkumgeb Dateityp WinZip Datei Abbrechen A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 157 Configuration reference Debugging Configuration IWU 158 Save the configuration file using the default name logfiles tgz or change it according your needs Don t use blanks in the filename Clear logfiles Use this functi
137. art Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 46 7 Start system services and register handsets at the IWU 8 Attach and configure further BSIP Only to the system 3 1 2 Example Configuration Several settings are needed for configuring a HPCIP system Inside this quick start following settings are used Configuration Option Value Page Network Gateways Network Gateway Server IP Address 192 168 100 1 Network Gateway Server IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 Network Gateway Default Gateway 192 168 100 83 Network Gateway NTP Server Time Server 192 168 201 94 Gateway PBX Name OpenScape Office MX 3bx Gateway PBX IP Address 192 168 201 94 Gateway PBX Netmask 255 255 255 0 Page DECT Password DECT Server IP Address 192 168 10 1 DECT Server IP Netmask 255 255 255 0 DECT ARI 101b2ff5 DECT PIN 87654321 Page User User No 1 MSN DisplayName AuthName 761 761 761 1234 Password User No 2 MSN DisplayName AuthName 762 762 762 2345 Password User No 3 MSN DisplayName AuthName 763 763 763 3456 3 1 3 Prepare and Connect Hardware 3 1 3 1 HPCIP BSIP Small Solution Attach the first BSIP1 to a PoE port of the network switch or via a Power injector to a standard port of the network switch Wait about 2 minutes until the LED states of the BSIP1 change to permanently green and red A31003
138. ateways All Ethernet frames towards the DECT network between the IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN Id configured for the DECT network option VLAN Id at page DECT this option Please take account of the correlating VLAN configuration of the VoIP Infra structure network Cos Value With the CoS Value Class of Service you can configure the prioritization of the Ethernet packets via Ethernet Layer2 according to 802 1p Default 0 i e no prioritization Using the dropdown you may select one of the pre configured CoS values Hint CoS relies on the configuration of a VLAN unequal to 0 MGW as GW only in Admin mode Activate this option to use the IWU as a router to the BSIP Only Background Using the option MGW as GW enables the routing ip forwarding via the IP VoIP Infrastructure Network to the DECT Network This ensures access to the network in which the BSIP Only are located without having an ip address in the DECT network configured at the maintenance PC Additionally you have to add a route at the maintenance PC A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 115 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 4 7 2 5 WBM gt Media Gateways gt IWU Network This page displays the table of configured IWU networks at all Media Gateways The contents inside the table are read only and only for informational purposes The cor
139. ault iwu_config tgz 4 After you have selected the desired configuration file you can load it into the IWU using the Upload button l 20140411 1145 V4 0 13 SEN 192 168 100 11 u gt During the upload process a message box with a progress bar will be displayed e Update your configuration please wait Update m Important All stored configuration is loaded into the WBM Ensure that you have loaded the correct configuration file Particularly ensure that all relevant IP address values are correct otherwise you won t be able to access the WBM after a reboot 5 After the configuration file is downloaded you have to apply or discard the changes For both actions a reboot has to be performed configuration p Apply configuration press Cancel or Reboot 4 3 1 2 Button Backup Config With this Button the complete configuration of the IWU can be backuped and stored on the file system of the maintenance PC A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 79 Configuration reference Administration IWU 1 After clicking on the button Backup Config a browser based file open dialog will be displayed immediately Offnen von iwu_config tgz Sie m chten folgende Datei herunterladen Cg iwu_config tgz Vom Typ WinZip Datei Von https 192 168 201 114 Wie soll Firefox mit dieser Datei verFahren ffnen mit Winzip Standard A
140. ault CF number Voicemail number of group see Group gt VM Number All forwarded calls are recorded in the call list of type forwarded call at the handsets service menu An entry in this list contains information about the phone number of the caller which was forwarded the number of calls the date time infor mation of the last entry The user is able to change the default CF number and the timeout setting for CFNRy This information is saved on a per user base until the user decides to delete all user specific settings using the service menu To activate the Call Forward functionality it has to be enabled in the WBM ona per group base Group gt GroupOfHandset gt CF CallForward Enabled If this option is enabled the corresponding menu for CallForward of all handset inside the current group HandsetUI gt Telephony gt Call Forward will be displayed Otherwise the menu is not being available at the handset UI and no CallForward functionality is available Hints A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Call Forward CF e Rejecting a call If an incoming alerting call regardless if it is the first call or second call is rejected by using the Reject soft key the call is forwarded to the CFB destination if CFB is set to activated Otherwise the call is being rejected with SIP reason 603 Decline e CFNRy If the user has activated CallWaiting the con
141. ay is established If set equal to Max Lines the next or previous table will only include other user entries If set to a values less than Max Lines some user entries of the old table are repeated Max Lines Step Size and new entries are displayed Step Size Button Previous Displays the next group of rows with an offset of Step Size Button Next Displays the previous group of rows with an offset of Step Size Sort functionality If a specific user entry was selected while a sort was applied the selected row will be the first entry in the sorted list If no user entry was selected while a sort was applied the row containing the first sort criteria will be the first entry in the sorted list If possible the search will be maintained if switching between subpages Hint Combining both Sort and Search functionality is possible 4 9 2 Configuration Page User User On this page the VoIP parameters for the Users are configured User User Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment Language Groups 1 v 00101 101 Sales 1 Deutsch 003 OS V_Branches 2 v 00102 102 Sales 2 Deutsch 003 OS Branches 3 v 00103 103 Sales 3 Deutsch 003 OS v Branches The columns of the configuration table have the following meaning Index Current number of the User entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 133 Configuration
142. ber of Location Areas Number of RPN Location area Location Area Length LAL System Pin The PIN is a 8 digit number and it is needed for the registration of Handsets It is preconfigured with 00000000 and may be configured on a MGW base here Hint The ciphering method uses the System Pin to cipher the speech connec tions of the handsets on air The System Pin is transmitted to the handset during the registration process If the System Pin is changed later this will lead to disturbed voice connections In this case the handsets have to be reregistered at the IWU Default TPUI Configuration option for compatibility issues with third party Dect devices as well as for large Systems only in WBM mode IkonAdmin available For details refer to Section 5 25 Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI By default it is suggested to enable this option in BSIP IWU and Server IWU 4 7 1 2 Media Gateways gt Dect Network BSIP IWU and Server IWU This page displays the table of the Media Gateway Local containing the local Dect network specific configuration There is only one entry in the table which cannot be deleted A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 105 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 106 Media Gateways Dect Network Dect Network Index Name Dect Serverlp Dect Netmask Dect Listen Port YPN en VLAN Id 1 MgwLocal 192 168
143. c gt Sync refer to Section 4 10 4 Configuration Page Dect Sync For further details regarding the setup of a MGW IWU system refer to Section 6 6 Installation of MGW IWU system Depending on the Inter Media gateway synchronization topology chain or star based a Media Gateway may be configured as External Sync Master External Sync Slave or a combined External Sync Master and Slave 1 Example configuration of a MGW which serves as an External Sync Master e One BSIP configured as type Bslp SyncType 1588 master All other BSIP are configured as type Bslp SyncType 1588 slave e One Crosslink configured as type CrossLinkSrv SyncType ext master The ParkSync is derived from the module configured as 1588 master 2 Example configuration of a MGW which serves as an External Sync Slave e One BSIP configured as type Bslp SyncType air 1588 master The ParkSync is derived from the Virtual Base module All other BSIP are configured as type Bslp SyncType 1588 slave e One Crosslink configured as type CrossLinkCli SyncType n a e One Virtual Base configured as type Virt Base SyncType ext slave The ParkSync is derived from the Crosslink module A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities These combinations may be mixed on MGW s Therefore it is possible to build a star based MGW s
144. cal 101b2ff 6 31 255 1 RPNs Loc Area LAL 39 oooo0000 v Hint Editing of the Media Gateway Local entry is supported during running System services A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 103 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 104 4 7 1 1 Media Gateways gt Dect BSIP IWU and Server IWU This page displays the table of the Media Gateway Local containing the local Dect specific configuration There is only one entry in the table which cannot be deleted The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Index This new column displays the index of the MGW Local This value cannot be changed Enabled For a Media Gateway Local this entry is always enabled and cannot be changed Name For a Media Gateway Local this entry is always set to MgwLocal and cannot be changed ARI excl FPS In the field ARI excl FPS and FPS the System ARI DECT ID which has to be unique at each DECT system has to be configured The SystemAri is provided by the system implementer Supported System Ari classes are Class B Ari Hint All handset registrations are bound to a specific System ARI If the System ARI is changed all handsets loose their registration at the IWU To achieve system functionality the handsets have to be registered again at the IWU This field contains the Dect ARI excluding the FPS part ARC EIC FPN FPS This field contai
145. configure the polling cycle of the LDAP server in seconds which is used to detect an outage of the LDAP server 5 14 2 1 Adding a new LDAP Server Add a new LDAP Server under WBM Network Gateways Servers Type LDAP and configure IpAddr and PollTimer in seconds Hint General changes in the LDAP Server configuration require a reboot of the IWU except assigning a LDAP Map file which may be loaded during running services 5 14 2 2 Assigning a LDAP Map File To use the LDAP search a LDAP Map file has to be loaded for the LDAP server Therefore select an existing LDAP server and click on button Import Server Config A file open dialog will appear Browse to the map file you have edited before according your needs and load the file Hint The state of the LDAP server may be derived from the output of the NetworkState in section LDAP status 5 14 2 3 Assigning a LDAP Server to a Group Besides the LDAP map file the further usage of the LDAP phonebook is accom plished on a group specific base at the WBM WBM gt Group gt LDAP Server A LDAP phonebook is made available to the user by assigning the LDAP server to the group the user is belongs to If a LDAP server is configured for the user a new service menu Phonebook is made available Depending on the presence of a System phonebook the LDAP phonebook may be located at the handsets UI under Phonebook gt LDAP phonebook or directly under Phonebook 5 1
146. corresponding menu for VoiceMail at the handset UI will be displayed only if the belonging WBM configuration in the handset s group Group GroupOfHandset VM VoiceMail Enabled is enabled f Voicemail is deactivated at the gateway s group the SIP notifications from the PBX are ignored The MWI LED state on off is solely updated using a silence call to the handset if the associated MWI information MWI yes no has changed This suppresses needless silent calls to the handset which otherwise would occupy a DECT channel A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Message Waiting Indication MWI The common configuration of Voicemail Activation and number is confi gured exclusively at the WBM All other user specific configurations are user specific settings which are exclusively configured at the handset s service menu 5 8 1 3 MWILED Activation Deactivation The MWILED is activated and deactivated depending on the VoiceMail state and the entries in the missed call lists The content of the call lists for forwarded and received calls have no influence on the MWI LED The MWI LED will be switched on if at least one unread entry the leftmost entry in the line in the call list VoiceMail or call list missed is available The MWI LED will not be switched off until all unread entries the leftmost entry in the line in the e call list Voic
147. counter displays how often a short term absolute time difference in a range smaller than 1000 nano sec was detected Limit2 reached This counter displays how often a short term absolute time difference in a range between 1000 and 5000 nano sec was detected Limit3 reached This counter displays how often a short term absolute time difference in a range between 5000 and 20000 nano sec was detected If this period was detected over a time period of longer than 50 seconds the 1588 Slave will go OutOfSync and a resynchronization process for this BSIP will be initiated 4 12 5 Configuration Page Status gt RSSI HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 htmljwbm pro html session id 132759 33784c 13972156796427ic 139721 C E lighscreencaptue mo P amp A A i HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G unire S Status Status Base RSSI TsSync Tx 00 Tx 01 Tx 02 Tx 03 Tx 04 Tx 05 Tx 06 Tx OF Tx 08 Tx 08 Tx 10 Tx 11 Rx 00 Rx fi Base RSSI ca 30 Search Scope MGW 001 MGVV_Berlin_1 O Rssi Limit 85 Cycle s 0 from 10 04 2014 11 17 44 inited 9 dp Module 002 Bslp 1 002 Refresh to now 180 Clear Statistics Previous A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU On this
148. coustically The Call Waiting tone is defined in Section 8 4 4 Call waiting tone If the second call is waiting there are three several possibilities to react onto the second call A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 229 Feature Descriptions System Phonebook 1 Rejecting the waiting call Using the Softkey Reject will reject the waiting call 2 Put the active call on hold and accept the waiting call automatically Use the green on hook button or the Softkey Menu gt Call accept to put the A party call into hold and automatically connect to the waiting call The further call flow is identically to a held call 3 Disconnect active call and accept waiting call manually after alert Use the red on hook button tor the Softkey Menu gt Call hangup to disconnect the active call and manually connect to the waiting call after alert Hints e Call Waiting is signaled at the handset only during an active call to another user If the user is serving a second call already e g first call was put on hold the incoming Call Waiting is not signaled In this case the handset answers with BUSY e Anincoming second call which is not accepted is added to the call list of missed calls 5 18 System Phonebook 230 In addition to the local handset phonebook and the LDAP access to a central directory a central System Phonebook on the IWU has been implemented Using an import interface
149. ction 5 1 4 2 bsipStatistics nn Root OlD 1 1 n n 2 14 5 1 8 SNMP MIB Tree MGW IWU mode Root OID 3 The Root OID is assigned the OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 36378 All MGW IWU specific MIBS mgwMibs are located inside the OID Root OID 3 n 5 1 8 1 mgwStatistics Version Root OlD 3 1 1 This value Integer has to be queried by a SNMP manager to refresh the content of the IWU counters into the SNMP counter tables A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 193 Feature Descriptions SNMP 194 The SNMP object name is mgwStatistics Version the OID is Root OID 3 1 1 5 1 8 2 mgwStatistics nn Root OID 3 1 n nz2 14 The SNMP MIBs provide statistical data of the IWU one table per day to retrieve them by SNMP queries A maximum of 14 statistical counter tables for the last 14 days are stored Therefore one table holds the data for the current time period current day the other tables provide data for the last 13 days The naming conventions of the SNMP values according the OID Object Identifier is composed as follows The table with the current period of time is assigned the relative OID 2 Root OID 1 1 2 The table of the last day is assigned the relative OID 3 Root OID 1 1 3 The table of the day before yesterday is assigned the relative OID 4 Root OID 1 1 4 and so on Value Type Description mgwlIndex nn I
150. d TPUI instead of Default TPUI lille 238 5 25 1 Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI 0 0 0 ee 238 5 26 Validation for Uniqueness of PMID and TPUI 0 0 ee RII III 239 5 27 User Search Options V1R5 0 0 hr 239 5 28 Dect Fundamentals yesi aa n A a a neta 241 9 28 14 LOCAtION ATOA o ree EEE EON DR DERE NER DEN MINE PEE MER NEN ee ath 241 5 28 2 Requirements for Roaming 0 0 cece e hs 243 5 28 3 Requirements for Handover 0 cee rr 243 5 28 3 1 Modulo Problem E a A mm E 243 5 28 4 MGW specific fundamentals for Roaming lisi 244 6 Configuration TechniquesS 200 c ec rh hh n n nh nn 245 6 1 Free IP Addressirigsss ta nEn e ie RN MA eh ois Peleg ea a Oecd as ep Oi RONERIXERAS 245 6 2 Addinginew BSIP sist ede G8 taut ae title od inp danke bad ed ATUS oni whe Eel a ee Gane 245 6 2 1 Scanning of BSIP V1R1 with IWU V1R2 and newer 00 0c eee 246 6 3 Multi Register Bulk Registering of Handsets 0 0 00 ce eee 247 6 4 Downgrading a HPCIP System 1 2 20 000 teens 248 6 5 Virtualization of MGW IWU 0 teens 248 6 6 Installation of MGW IWU system 1 2 0 0 auauna 249 6 6 1 Base installation onto Server Rx 100 S8 2 0 tee 249 6 6 2 Base installation MGW IWU virtualized onto ESXi 0 0000 eee 250 6 6 2 1 Create virtualized machine environment 000 ccc tee 250 6 6 3 Installation of MGW IWU 0 0 mrs 252
151. d area of DECT IP base station is less e configuration of DECT IP systems is simplified because all DECT IP base stations can be synchronized to only one synchronization master On the other hand great demands are made on the Ethernet characteristics like symmetry packet loss delay jitter variance of delay Therefore special requirements regarding the Ethernet components especially the Ethernet switches used have to be considered Exceeding of limits especially of jitter will lead to loss of synchronization which will finally lead to a resynchronization process During this process the belonging Base Stations are unable to establish telephony connections Synchronization topology The Synchronization according Ethernet solely uses a star shaped topology Maximally one Base Station serves a Synchronization Master Sync Master all other Base Station which participate at the synchronization serve as Synchroni zation Slaves Sync Slave Resynchronization The DECT functionality of all BSIP which are configured as IEEE1588 Sync Slaves depends on the availability of the IEEE1588 Sync Master If the Sync Master is not functional e g not Online due to Ethernet problems the DECT functionality of all IEEE1588 sync slave BSIP will go down During this time no telephony is possible General requirements on the Ethernet system A maximum number of three cascaded Ethernet switches are supported between the Sync Master SM a
152. d automatically by the system Wait about 2 minutes until the BSIP1 is started completely LED states should be green red 17 To verify the configured values of the previous steps click on SCAN e scanning modules 18 At the WBM of the BSIP IWU switch to configuration page Dect About Verify if the values IpAddr Module and IpAddr Server contain the correct values which have been configured before IpAddrModule gt IpAddr Module Server Ip gt IpAddr Server 3 1 10 Start system services and register handsets 3 1 10 1 Start system services 1 Switch to configuration page System To start the functionality of the BSIP IWU you first have to start the system services 2 Startthe services by clicking the System Start button at the bottom section Starting the services requires some time 3 Check if the system services are running by clicking at the Refresh button several times A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 63 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 64 System Enabled Applic Name Status Up since Service v capisrv exe Running 10 04 2014 18 24 E vi iwu exe Running 10 04 2014 18 25 E If the system services are started correctly both states displayed as Running the LED state at the BSIP IWU should change from orange orange to green off If a time server is configured correctly and can be contacted the field Up
153. date of the current firmware running on the active partition of the Media Gateway as read with Scan Partinfo1 This field displays the version number of the firmware running on partition of the Media Gateway as read by a Scan Additionally the label Active indicates that this is the active partition of the MG A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 118 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Partinfo2 This field displays the version number of the firmware running on partition of the Media Gateway as read by a Scan Additionally the label Active indicates that this is the active partition of the MG IpAddr Main This field displays the IP address of the Media Gateway IWU network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan MAC Addr This field displays the MAC address of the Media Gateway as read from the MGW with Scan 4 7 2 8 WBM Media Gateways VoIP Network This page displays the table of configured VoIP networks at a specific Media Gateway The contents inside the table are currently read only The values of the MGW Voip networks are equal to the MGW IWU network settings since no support of specific MGW Voip network configuration is included in this version of V1R5 The subpages in this group right to the spacer display information about a specific Media Gateway which has to be selected using a dropdown at the bottom of the page Med
154. dding a new user entry and then simply assign the next DECT handset registration to the last user To start the multi register process at least one user entry with start values has to be configured manually This user entry serves as the template user for the users which will be added Select an existing enabled user entry After clicking on Multi register a handset may be registered directly After successful registering of the handset a new user entry will be added which is populated with the IPUI of the registered handset For this entry values are incre mented by default Now the next handset may be registered This process may be repeated several times The Multi Register process may be stopped by using the CANCEL button Hint This feature is available in Unify Admin mode only The following table gives an overview how the new values are created The user template is the user which was selected initially before starting the Multi Register process Option Action for new value Index DisplayIndex Will be incremented automatically Enabled Copied from option Enabled of the user template Msn Incremented from option MSN of the user template DisplayName Incremented from option MSN of the user template depending on the InternCallLen of the assigned group only the right no of InternCallLen digits are used Comment Incremented from option MSN of the user template La
155. dless IP Administrator Documentation 37 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities The Media Gateway IWU needs a license The Server IWU needs a license The BSIP IWU doesn t need a license 2 11 4 Process Names Process Name Description capisrv Running on Server IWU and BSIP IWU iwu Running on the MGW IWU Server IWU and BSIP IWU capigw Running on the MGW IWU communicates with MGW processes running on MGW s mediagw Running on the MGW communicates with capigw process running on MGW IWU setupapplic Running on each of the entities 2 12 Details to System Entities 38 2 12 1 Media Gateway IWU DHCP is not supported at the MGW IWU since a global concept of DHCP including WBM IWU and MGW is not possible due to the L3 separation of these entities 2 12 2 Media Gateway To access the BSIP from the Media GW IWU network for Debugging purposes it is possible to activate an option similarly to MGW as GW on the present IWU Up to 120 BSIP per MGW are supported Due to the high system load of the BSIP running as 1588 Master with up to 119 1588 Clients connecting to the 1588 master a reduction of the max concurrent calls at the BSIP 1588 master up to 0 calls has to be configured For details refer to Section 2 12 2 2 Limitation of calls at 1588 master base For each MGW up to 120 modules are supported Besides the module type Bslp for a physical BSIP1 there ar
156. dy Link unsynchronized DECT LAN no active call d i No power on base station off nee off Esa il BSIP is booting the Active partition bnt B E E bam a a R BSIP is booting the Fallback partition wow H B B off pese BSIP is booting the Active partition with factory defaults ind I i i i UT i i B B BSIP is booting the Fallback partition with factory defaults Mos i j l off n BSIP is booting kernel with Active partition off ERG red ERN BSIP is booting kernel with Fallback partition red ax mmm orange _ Link synchronized DECT LAN at least one active call BSIP ready green Link unsynchronized DECT LAN at least one active call rl blinking F ij E BSIP ready green green Link synchronized DECT LAN no active call EM EE BSIP ready green EE uu MEN Blinking frequency 500 msec 500 msec Blinking frequency fast 250 msec 250 msec On a BSIP IWU this LED state indicates that a cal by the IWU itself A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation may be located on another BSIP but is handled Appendix Handset UI 8 3 Handset UI 258 T 8 3 1 Service Menu Overview of all possible entries of the handset UI if all options are activated Hint Entries in the handset UI are limited to 15 chars English g Call Lists m uu rr VoiceMail lL Dial Voice Mail L uu rr missed L prae list
157. e WBM overview IWU 4 Configuration reference For the configuration of the HiPath Cordless IP system you have to connect via a Browser to the IWU 4 1 WBM overview IWU 4 1 1 Different WBM modes WBM Users Hint Where not other stated all documentation is described for WBM mode Unify Standard Unify The system has two built in factory default WBM users WBM mode Username Default password Unify Standard Unify 1q21q2 Unify Administration UnifyAdmin 1q21q2 Using the WBM mode Unify Administration more or changed configuration options are available For most configuration tasks WBM mode Unify Standard is sufficient Important note The default password for both users is set to 1q21q2 These User Names and their passwords are converted by the update process from a version lt V1 R5 0 0 to versions gt V1 R5 1 0 even if the password for the users were changed before Future password changes inside V1 R5 are not converted anymore Therefore the initial login password for both users initially running V1 R5 1 0 is 1q21q2 The User Names and Passwords are converted e by an update of the HPCIP software from version lt V1 R5 0 0 to version gt V1 R5 1 0 e after a newly installation using HCIP Installation CD V1 R5 1 0 or newer e afactory reset of a HPCIP installation running V1 R5 1 0 or newer Hint The user transformation process will NOT be applied when loading a confi gurat
158. e IP configuration as the MGW IWU network 5 Media Gateway CrossLink network MGW IWU and MGW application mode This network hosts the communication between Media Gateways mainly for signaling and DECT Handover communication By default this network is bound to the same IP configuration as the MGW IWU network 6 BSIP internal networks For internal communication between the different hardware components of the BSIP1 there are two further networks configured Important These addresses are fixed and cannot be changed Keep in mind that these addresses may not be used for the VoIP network and the DECT network Furthermore no other components which are accessing the IWU or BSIP Only may use one of these addresses 192 168 123 x Network between the BSIP1 Local DECT module 222 and the BSIP1 IWU 111 169 254 222 x Network between the two main processors CSP 1 and MSP 2 for internal communication Important All BSIP1 devices must be located inside the same network segment and therefore MUST NOT be separated by layer 3 routing devices Only Layer 2 switches are supported between the BSIPs 1 3 1 Overview of Reserved Networks Host IPs 192 168 1 1 24 and 192 168 2 1 24 are used for factory defaults of BSIP Only and BSIP IWU IP network 192 168 123 0 24 for internal communication between CSP and DECT Baseband controller BBC IP network 169 254 222 0 24 for internal communication between CSP and MSP 1 3 2 Requireme
159. e and the query and response content has to be adapted to match It is the LDAP Server that determines what data is available and not the phone The adaptation will be achieved using an LDAP template file that defines the item name mappings and the corresponding prompts on the display 5 14 2 Configuration of LDAP server LDAP configuration of HPCIP is a three step process 1 Configuration of a LDAP server IP address authentication credentials and a Poll Timer This data is configured at WBM Network Gateway Servers 2 Configuration of a mapping file which provides the specific mapping between the LDAP specific fields and the output in the LDAP phonebook This file is created and edited on a separate PC and has to be assigned to a specific LDAP server defined in the previous step by importing this server Config using the WBM 3 Assigning the LDAP server to a group All properties of an LDAP Server are assigned to a users handset by assigning the LDAP server to a group which the user is part of Hints for LDAP configuration The LdapServerName configured in the LdapMapFile and further LDAP specific information will be displayed in the output of the NetworkState in section LDAP status The LDAP map files are stored in the backup file of the IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions LDAP Phonebook The Poll Timer option is needed to
160. e dee hon ee ee Incomin 2 e eojo uo tu t Outgoin oo coc O f NON Intracell S S S 1e 991 Intercell o ojojo ojojo External ooo of OO Internal 2 2 3 1 Ext MGW R eo jojoileoilojnoj Ext MGW R ejojojo l lejo Ext SITE 2 2 2 1 The columns of the table have the following meaning Index This field contains the unique absolute index number of the user inside the IWU The number is assigned by the IWU and cannot be changed Msn This field displays the configured MSN of the associated user DisplayName This field displays the DisplayName of the associated User Home MGW only for MGW IWU This field displays the number of the MGW the user s Home Media Gateway is assigned to VOIP Loc on MGW only for MGW IWU This field displays the number of the MGW the VoIP call was last located on VOIP state changes This counter displays the number of Voip state changes of the user see Voip states Incoming calls This counter displays the number of incoming connections direction PBX gt BSIP gt handset which have been signaled for the User If a handset paging was unsuccessfully e g not reachable outside Dect range this call is counted to the Incoming calls of the user A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 165 Configuration reference Status Configuration IW
161. e default Group name default Gateways Select the gateway from the dropdown field which you have configured in the last step This configuration example uses the gateway OpenScape Office MX 3bx Intern Call Length With this setting the maximum number of digits of the calling Party number for internal calls is configured Calls with a larger number of digits are signaled as external calls at the handset The default value is 3 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 57 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 58 3 1 8 2 User Hint Alternatively it is possible to register several users at once using the Bulk Registration Mode Since this method is out of scope of a quick start the manual methode is used here Switch to configuration page User sub page User User gt User Set up one or several Users according the user configuration at the PBX for the connection with the BSIP1 Please take care of the consistency of the entries between the PBX and the BSIP1 2 Add anew user by clicking on the button Add User Hints To add a new user entry even during running system services it is necessary to select an existing user otherwise an error message will appear and then click on button Add User A new entry with default values is inserted above the selected user entry For the correlation of the fields between the BSIP and the PBX refer to
162. e drift between the first and the last base station may be too large to ensure proper seamless handover between these two Base Stations A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 15 Introduction Synchronization Over Air Concept e In contrast to a line or Ethernet based synchronization the synchronization signals is transmitted over air To achieve efficient signal strength of the synchronization signal the radio distance between two synchronized base Stations is crucial This fact has to be considered adequately during the radio site survey e Ifa BSIP loses synchronization it tries to resynchronize to its configured synchronization base station This process can not start until the last call at this base station is released and no other calls at the belonging base station are active A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 16 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Introduction Synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 1 5 Synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 In contrast to an air based synchronization mechanisms synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE1588 PTP Precious Time Protocol requires less configu ration The main advantages of synchronization via LAN are e more flexibility in the location of the DECT IP base station no need to built synchronization chains as with synchronization via DECT e less DECT IP base stations may be required because the overlappe
163. e for exchanging the DECT specific air sync information which is needed for Inter Media Gateway Synchronization Therefore they are bound to the MGW IWU network A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 39 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities 40 CrossLink module type The CrossLink modules CrossLinkSrv and CrossLinkCli are automatically created by the IWU for those MGW which are located inside the same site Site Id For each MGW pair a CrossLinkSrv and CrossLinkCli are created there is no functional difference between CrossLinkSrv and CrossLinkCli Virtual Dect Module Type The virtual Dect module entry is automatically created by the IWU if one of the CrossLink sides CrossLinkSrv or CrossLinkCli sync type will be switched to from n a to ext master This will initiate the creation of a module of type Virt Base on the MGW of the crosslink s opposite side Destination side The Virt base module will be automatically configured by the IWU with a sync setting of ext slave and a ParkSync which refers to the Index of the Crosslink to the other MGW Please keep in mind that switching the CrossLinks sync type from n a to ext master requires the configuration of a ParkSync1 for the CrossLink This ParkSync1 entry has to point to a BSIP on the current MGW For further details regarding the corresponding options of Sync and type Dect gt Syn
164. e is displayed in nano sec per 100 msec Drift correction This counter displays the correction value between the Drift initial value and the current corrected value The value is displayed in nano sec per 100 msec Delay min This counter displays the minimum sync delay in nano sec of the current 1588 Sync Slave to its 1588 Sync Master This value corresponds to the one way delay time of a 1588 Sync Slave to its 1588 Sync Master between all switch hops More number of switch hops between a 1588 Sync Slave and its 1588 Sync Master will increase this value Jitter average This counter displays the average jitter in nano sec of the current 1588 Sync Slave to its 1588 Sync Master Time diff This counter displays the current time difference or offset in nano sec of the current 1588 Sync Slave to its 1588 Sync Master Delay req retry This counter displays how often an incomplete DELAY_REQ cycle was detected Delay min retry This counter displays how often a retry to gather the absolute time difference was established Delay min new This counter displays how often a retry to gather the absolute time difference with a new calculated Delay min window was established Delay resp miss This counter displays how often a missing DELAY_RESP message was detected A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 179 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Limit1 reached This
165. e number of the Active System the middle button always contains the number of the inactive system Therefore the button description may change depending on the active system In this example Active System 2 is used By clicking on Active 2 the IWU will reboot into the same partition and start with System 2 as the active partition By clicking on Inactive 1 the IWU will reboot into the opposite partition and start with System 1 as the active partition By clicking on Cancel the dialog will be closed Shutdown Board only for Server based platforms By using this functionality theserver based platforms Server IWU MGW IWU or MGW may be shut down and the server will be switched off automatically Different Applic Mode xxx buttons Depending on platform BSIP or server based and application mode BSIP Only BSIP IWU Server IWU MGW IWU and MGW different Applic Mode xxx button will be available on the WBM which will be described in detail below Hint The current working mode is printed out at the bottom status line APPLICTYPE BSIPONLY IWU or MGWIWU and in the output of Network State Applic Mode IWU only available in BSIP Only WBM To change the application mode of the BSIP1 from BSIP Only to BSIP IWU select Applic Mode IWU J After changing the application mode the following message box will appear A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 83 Configurati
166. e options on other subpages and also within these subpages A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 159 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 160 4 12 1 General Status Information Depending on the subpage the following options may differ slightly from page to page The most common options are Cycle s 0 from 10 04 2014 11 17 44 inited Refresh to now Clear Statistics Previous Cycles s If a numeric value different than 0 is configured the display will automatically refresh after the configured number of seconds After changing this value the button Refresh has to be clicked Besides the refresh of the display internal values are refreshed if the selected scope is Absolute Please note High frequency update rates e g 1 2 or 3 sec should be avoided Refresh Stop Manually refreshes the counters displayed After changing the value of option Cycle s unequal to 0 the automatic refresh will be active after clicking on Refresh The caption of the Refresh button then changes to Stop After a reapply of button Stop the automatic refresh will stop and the caption of button Stop changes back to Refresh Clear Statistics Clears resets all counters to 0 except Limitx reached after a confirmation dialog On the right side of the lower frame some options are located to select the time frame of the displayed values The time frame
167. e other module types see WBM gt Dect gt About Type which are required for Inter Media Gateway Synchronization These module types also reduce the maximum number of module resource per MGW 120 For details refer to Section 2 12 2 3 Max no of BSIP per MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities Using air Sync for 120 BSIP exclusively is not specified due to the max number of hops between Sync Slave and Sync Master which may not be realized by a high amount of BSIP The Firmware management update of a MGW as well as the update of the basestations is only available by the WBM of the MGW itself It cannot be initiated by the WBM of MGW IWU DHCP is not supported at the MGW since several networks have to be confi gured which is not a standard option in DHCP To prevent potential paging problems of the handsets at a high amount of basestations 120 the paging area domains may be configured separately by means of the Dect LAL Location Area Level parameter In former versions each BSIP built its own paging area LAL 39 therefore a page request has to be sent to each BSIP separately This lead to a high paging message rate if several handsets were paged simultaneously which may had overflew the page queues at the BSIP The MGW will not provide specific MIBs or traps Only OS MIBS are available if queried direct
168. e resons on the Server side The HPCIP LDAP search is NOT functional iHt LDAP status 1Ht LDAPServerOSO Ip Address 192 168 100 30 Status offline no response Server is Offline e g the LDAP Server doesn t respond to a LDAP query The HPCIP LDAP search is NOT functional LDAP status 1Ht LDAPServerOSO it Ip Address 192 168 100 30 Status offline invalid credentials Server is Offline e g the LDAP authentication couldn t be established due to invalid creden tials The HPCIP LDAP search is NOT functional LDAP status tHt System services not running System services not running The HPCIP LDAP search is NOT functional 1Ht LDAP status 1Ht Ip Address 192 168 100 30 Status unknown System services are running but no LDAP map file imported The HPCIP LDAP search is NOT functional A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions LDAP Phonebook 5 14 6 Using the LDAP Phonebook Hint If a Phonebook Prefix WBM gt Group gt Phonebook Prefix is configured this prefix is prepended to the Dial String if the Telephone Number contains more digits than the InternCallLen If the Phone Number is equal or less the Intern CallLen it is treated as an internal number and therefore no prefix is used To use the LDAP phonebook simply open the handsets service menu by pressing the left center key Inside the se
169. e save dialog and stored locally on the IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SNMP 5 Feature Descriptions 5 1 SNMP 5 1 1 SNMP General SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol is used by the HPCIP system mainly to detect overload situations of the system These may be queried by a SNMP Server SNMP MIB Management Information Base or may be signaled by the IWU SNMP Trap Furthermore the MIBs and traps of the OS LINUX openwrt may be used but are provided as is The implementation uses SNMP version 2 with fixed ports For the HPCIP system a specific MIB file is available The Name of the used MIB is HPCIP MIB Traps are delivered as traps defined by SNMP V1 All MIBs are read only read write is not supported The IWU provides besides SNMP values and tables which may be queried with a SNMP manager also SNMP traps which are signaled to a SNMP management System which IP address has to be configured in the WBM of the IWU These traps are sent only if a IP address for a SNMP server has been configured Since a lot of data has to be queried by the IWU for each SNMP request this will lead to a high system load of the IWU especially on a BSIP IWU a special mechanism was implemented to refresh the tables only if needed Therefore a specific SNMP value has to be queried by the SNMP management system to trigger the actualization of the SNMP tables by
170. e users has to have roaming permission configured for a specific MGW If no entry of the MGW index of the users group exists the users handset will display No Roaming at this MGW For details refer to Section 2 4 User Roaming and Section 4 8 2 Configuration Page Group 7 1 7 Display Message User deactivated This message will be displayed if the handsets user entry is disabled at the WBM 7 1 8 Display Message Roaming Overload This message will be displayed if the max no of roaming users has been exceeded at the MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Appendix Configuration Hints for Web Browser 8 Appendix 8 1 Configuration Hints for Web Browser 8 1 1 Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Firefox Versions 2 x up to 28 x are supported Firefox versions up to 26 are not actively tested but should work The minimum supported screen resolution the Browser is running on is 1024x768 8 1 2 Microsoft Internet Explorer The following version of Microsoft Internet Explorer are supported e Version 8 x e Version 9 x e Version 10 x e Version 11 x Hint Version 11 x is not tested already The minimum supported screen resolution the Browser is running on is 1024x768 Depending of the security settings of MS IE the IP address of the BSIP1 has to be added to the list of Trusted sites Tools Internet options Security Trusted sites This comes in effect when backing up
171. eMail and call list missed are set to O Hint If the PBX delivers only the Boolean state yes no for voice messages this will be reflected by setting the number of unread messages in the call list to 1 or 0 Important note Due to specific issues for the MWI message inside the DECT signaling flow the MWI state may only be signaled if the handset is alerting for at least two seconds under normal DECT conditions 5 8 1 4 PBX specific MWI functionality OSOMX V3R2 OSO sends MWI NOTIFY messages even unsolicited The NOTIFY message does not include the number of unread read messages at all Instead only the Boolean state MWI yes no will be signaled OSV OSV sends MWI NOTIFY messages even unsolicited The NOTIFY message does not include the number of read messages Instead only the number of unread messages will be signaled A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 213 Feature Descriptions Enhanced Display Information 5 8 1 5 Technical Background Information The SIP Subscriber will subscribe to the MWI service using a SIP SUBSCRIBE message In case the status of the Message Inbox changes change of new messages count the SIP Subscriber will be informed about that change with a SIP NOTIFY message The NOTIFY message contains two information fields new message yes no and the number of unread read messages if available The IWU has to interpret these changes and has to decide
172. eMail will be displayed Otherwise the menu is not available at the handset UI and no VoiceMail functio nality is available Group gt GroupOfHandset gt VM Number VoiceMail The extension of the VoiceMail system at the corresponding PBX of the group may be configured here optional This number serves for a dual purpose issue 1 It is used for the default CallForward destinations at the handset s Ul HandsetUI gt Telephony gt Call Forward 2 It is used further as the default extension which will be dialed if the user activates the VoiceMail entry inside the missed calls list 5 8 1 Activation of VoiceMail by Call Forward Using the new functionality for user initiated Call Forwarding incoming calls at the users handset may be configured independently of the Call Forward setting of the PBX on a per user base at the handset If the user decides to forward his calls to his Voice Mailbox or to another number this is accomplished by using the UI of the handset For example to activate an unconditional CallForward for external calls to the Mailbox open the handsets service menu by pressing the handsets Center Key on the left and select the following menu Telephony gt Call Forward gt External gt Uncondition CFU 71 Back The first entry deactivated is selected by default To change the state to activated simply press the soft key labeled Ok The state changes to activated You may leave the menu by
173. ear e Possible resulting differences between the last IP configuration values and the new values are marked specially For the IP changes to come in effect a reboot of the IWU is required After initiating a reboot process by clicking the Reboot button a new DHCP request will be issued If new values have been assigned meanwhile these values are displayed This ensures that that the current assigned values are printed out at the WBM A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 197 Feature Descriptions DHCP 198 If the DHCP flag has been toggled to enabled and a DHCP REQUEST was successful the newly assigned IP address values are stored inside the confi guration Activating the DHCP flag disables the editing of the manual values Important Note All DHCP settings as well as the manual IP settings apply to the active system partition 5 2 2 Implementation Detail for Activated DHCP If DHCP configuration was activated when the system booted the following rules apply During the start up phase of BSIP IWU The DHCP client automatically starts and emits a DHCP REQUEST If the DHCP client receives a positive acknowledge within a specific period of time response time the assigned IP configuration will be applied to the IWU ip address and netmask default gateway primary and secondary DNS server theses will override locally configured addresses If no DHCP server r
174. econd secondary beacon signal Online last This field displays the timestamp date and time at which a BSIP1 lastly changed its state to Online This time stamp is initially set when the system services are started After this state an Online last entry will be generated if the BSIP changes its state from Offline to Online Offline last This field displays the timestamp date and time at which a BSIP1 lastly changed its state to Offline If the status changes to Offline the Online last counter will be cleared Possible reasons for an Offline event are mainly Ethernet ip connectivity problems between the IWU and the BSIP Only 4 12 4 3 Page Base Mibs Status Base Mibs Index Module Nu Name Online ISyncCnt OnlineCnt BootCnt Outgoin Incomin ExtHO Cnt Intracell Intercell Roaming X Ovl 70 Ovl 100 1 3 CL 1 2 YES 0 4 0 0 a 1 0 0 0 a 0 3 1 Bslp 1 001 YES 0 4 4 0 1 0 0 1 2 0 0 4 2 Bslp 1 002 YES 4 4 4 11 16 0 0 0 10 0 0 The columns of the table have the following meaning A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 175 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 176 Index This field contains the absolute resp global index number of the DECT module This number identifies a module on a specific IWU globally and independent from the assigned MGW The number is assigned by the IWU and cannot be changed Module Number MGW This field contains the r
175. ed BSIP IWU Server IWU and MGW IWU the subpages may differ in its content HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 113254 31 18ic 1397208774610 ic 139720877 C E capture mouse pointer J A 2 0 Bi i HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G Administration Administration Configuration Configuration Restore Config Backup Config Program Info Active System Version System 1 System Update Reboot Board Version System 2 Shutdown Board Applic Mode IWU Applic Mode MGW Factory Setting Network State 4 3 1 Frame Configuration 4 3 1 1 Button Restore Config 1 With this button the whole configuration of the BSIP IWU can be restored from a previously backuped configuration from a file Hint The system services have to be stopped to use this feature Restore configuration and discard current 2 After confirming the action with button OK a file Restore Configuration Dialog opens A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 78 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Administration IWU Keine Datei ausgew hlt 3 After clicking on Durchsuchen or Browse depending on the language version of the browser you can select a configuration file using a browser based file open dialog by def
176. ed in this row may be left unchanged Local Servers Index Enabled Name IpAddr Type User Password Poll Timer v v L4 1 s 4 NTP 192 168 201 94 NTP 0 Add Server Delete Server Edit Server Import ServerConfig Show ServerConfig Important Ensure that the IP configuration is configured correctly Otherwise after rebooting the IWU it may not be accessible without resetting it to its factory defaults which have a fixed IP setting of 192 168 1 1 or 192 168 2 1 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 53 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 3 1 6 Configuration of DECT network Since configuration of the DECT Network settings requires a reboot of the BSIP1 the settings are configured before the BSIP1 hardware is attached to the desig nated network segment 1 Select the configuration page Media Gateways gt Dect Network Media Gateways Dect Network Index 1 54 Dect Network Name MgwLocal Dect Serverlp Dect Netmask Dect Listen Port YPN enable VLAN Id 192 168 10 1 255 255 255 0 10500 E 0 2 Change the configuration of entry MgwLocal in the table to the designated values of the BSIP IWU Dect Serverlp This field contains the IP address of the server the IWU in the DECT network It is used for communication between all BSIP Only and the IWU This configuration example uses the Server IP address 192 168 10 1 Dect Netmas
177. edia Gateway Media Gateway 5 9 o c e S 9 o o vo B d 2 2 o o If a user handovers to another MGW inside the same site the DECT call leg is not terminated at the former MGW anymore instead it is connected via the Cross Link to the other MGW Therefore two streams are allocated One at the former MGW and a further one at the new MGW see figure below Media Gateway Media Gateway Cross Connect Cross Connect Therefore each external handover from an originating MGW will reduce the no of streams at the destination MGW Example 100 calls have handovered from MGW1 to MGW2 Therefore at MGW2 only 20 120 100 streams are available Therefore only 20 new calls may be established at MGW2 as well as on MGW1 Hence the theoretical sum of all calls from MGW1 and MGW2 120 120 240 will be reduced to 100 20 20 140 This behavior has taken in account for OVL70 and OVL100 counters Whatever value calls or streams reaches the system limits first will trigger a OVL70 or OVL100 event A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 35 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Installation Process 2 11 Installation Process 36 Up to V1R4 two different installation images have been available One tar image for the BSIP IWU and one for the Server IWU For V1R5 this concept is already used One tar image for the BSIP IWU and one for the Server IWU MGW IWU MGW Therefore it
178. efore one table holds the data for the current time period current day the other tables provide data for the last 13 days The naming conventions of the SNMP values according the OID Object Identifier is composed as follows The table with the current period of time is assigned the relative OID 2 Root OID 1 1 2 The table of the last day is assigned the relative OID 3 Root OID 1 1 3 The table of the day before yesterday is assigned the relative OID 4 Root OID 1 1 4 and so on bsipStatistics nn Table Definition Value Type Description bsFrom Text Date time reason of start of the current MIB table bsTo Text Date time reason of stop of the current MIB table bsRPN Text RPN of the associated BSIP bsMAC Text MAC address of the associated BSIP bsName Text Name of the associated BSIP A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 189 Feature Descriptions SNMP 190 Value Type Description bsOVL70 Text This counter indicates how often 70 or more of the available channels of the associated BSIP had been occupied bsOVL100 Text This counter indicates how often 100 of the available channels of the associated BSIP had been occupied bsRoaming Text This counter indicates how often a roaming process location event of a handset without an active connection have been indicated at the associated BSIP Hint Handove
179. elative index number of the DECT module BSIP at a specific MGW The number may be changed manually Name This field displays the name of the Base Station Online Yes if the selected Base Station is in state Online No if the selected Base Station is in state Offline Hint A Base station is only functional if its state is online Therefore the BSIP has to be synced running the same firmware version on the same partition as the IWU and Ethernet and ip communication between the Server and the BSIP is established ISyncCnt In Sync Count This counter displays how often the Base Station did a resynchronization since the start of the system services OnlineCnt Online Count This counter displays how often a Online Offline change has been detected since the start of the system services Hint The counter OnlineCnt and BootCnt are incremented by starting the system services which reset the BBC on the BSIP and therefore are incremented by 1 s BootCnt Boot Count This counter displays how often the Base Station was booted since the start of the system services Outgoing calls This counter displays how often an outgoing connection direction handset gt BSIP gt PBX has been signaled A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Incoming calls This counter displays how often an incoming connection direction PB
180. entry To RedialBuffer Dial Delete entry Back Last list entry Back uu rr forwarded L First list entry To RedialBuffer LAE rz Dial Tu Delete entry Back Last list entry Back uu rr received L First list entry To RedialBuffer Dial Delete entry Back Last list entry Back Delete lists Back TTT Phonebook mmi yeten honebook E list entry Name Number E ms Last list entry Back LDAP Phonebook L search mask L First list entry r Name r Number Back Last list entry L Back Back Telephony Call Completion Call Back Delete All E Back Call Forward Internal Uncondition CFU r State p Number A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation L Back Busy CFB r State m Number Back No Reply CFNRy L State Timeout r Number Back NotReach CFNRc L State m Number Back Back External Uncondition CFU State r Number Back Busy CFB L State m Number Back No Reply CFNRy L State Timeout m Number Back NotReach CFNRc L State r Number Back Back Back m Call Waiting State Back Set defaults Back 8 3 2 Context Menus 8 3 2 1 Connected State English Connected State E
181. ervers A description of these parameters may be found in the previous chapter A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 100 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference SIP Configuration IWU Packet Size ms Configuration of RTP packet size only in WBM mode IkonAdmin available For details refer to Section 5 4 Support for Different RTP Packet Sizes Dtmf Selects the method for the transmission of DTMF digits tones to the Gateway Signaling The DTMF Digits are transmitted via the signaling protocol to the Gateway For SIP via the INFO method RTP The DTMF Digits are transmitted to the Gateway via the Voice RTP channel e g for SIP embedded in the RTP protocol according to RFC2833 There is no need to change this setting for the supported gateways The default setting is RTP Transport Protocol This option is needed to determine the Transport Protocol UDP or TCP of the current selected PBX for SIP signaling The default is Transport protocol is UDP For details refer to Section 5 22 SIP over TCP Direct Signaling This option determines if incoming INVITES from unknown not configured PBX IP address are accepted or rejected This support is limited to UDP as SIP transport protocol If this flag is disabled HPCIP accepts only calls from the IP address where the user is registered to This is the default setting If this flag is enabled HPCIP accepts cal
182. es are possible 1 Star based synchronization topology This topology uses just one Base station of the whole system as a synchroni zation Master Sync Master All other Base stations which take part at synchro nization are working as synchronization Slaves Sync Slave and receive their synchronization signal from the only Sync Master 2 Chain based synchronization topology This topology uses just one Base station of the whole system as a synchroni zation Master Sync Master All Base Stations are arranged in terms of topology ina chain The second Base Station receives its synchronization signal from the Sync Master and additionally provides the synchronization signal for the next Base Station in the chain that is this it serves as well as Sync Slave AND as Sync Master The second BSIP synchronizes to the first BSIP the third BSIP synchronizes to the second BSIP the fourth synchronizes to the third BSIP and so on Both topologies may be mixed to achieve large scale radio coverage Important Notes e The topological distance between a Air Sync Slave to the topmost Air Sync Master must not be more than 5 hops including the Master Base and the last Slave Base else the synchronization slip will be too large e Aresynchronization process will be initiated automatically if no call at the belonging Base Station is active e Avoid using a chain topology which is physically arranged as a circle In such a scenario th
183. escription Name trMgwSignalOnlineState OID Root OlD 4 2 Description This trap is triggered if the MGW Signaling Connection changes its state Online Offline Value Description trMgwindex Index of the associated MGW trMgwMAC MAC address of the associated MGW trMgwName Name of the associated MGW trMgwEvent Possible events are ONLINE OFFLINE A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 195 Feature Descriptions SNMP 5 1 9 3 trMgwOvi100 Root OID 4 3 Value Description Name trMgwOvl100 OID Root OlD 4 3 Description This trap is triggered if the OVL100 counter for the MGW has been triggered Value Description trMgwIndex Index of the associated MGW trMgwMAC MAC address of the associated MGW trMgwName Name of the associated MGW trMgwEvent Possible events are OVL100 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 196 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions DHCP 5 2 DHCP Due to the specific architecture of the HPCIP system some special conditions have to be considered for the design of the DHCP functionality e In contrast to common VoIP phones which are equipped with a local console keypad and display the BSIP has no local Console access In case of IP configuration errors e g due to a incorrectly configured DHCP server i
184. esponds within the response time then the last stored IP configuration will be applied to the IWU The output of the Network state button displays the results of the last DHCP REQUEST During the operation mode of BSIP IWU Refer to the procedures described before after applying button network state A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Ethernet Synchronization acc IEEE1588 5 3 Ethernet Synchronization acc IEEE1588 Towards an Ethernet based Synchronization acc IEEE1588 PTP Precious Time Protocol great demands are made on Ethernet characteristics like symmetry packet loss delay jitter variation of delay Therefore special requirements regarding the Ethernet components especially the Ethernet switches used have to be considered Exceeding of limits especially of jitter will lead to loss of synchronization which will finally lead to a resynchronization process During this process the belonging Base Stations are unable to establish telephony connec tions The Synchronization according Ethernet solely uses a star shaped topology Maximally one Base Station BSIP Only serves a Synchronization Master Sync Master all other Base Station which participate at the synchronization serve as Synchronization Slaves Sync Slave Resynchronization The DECT functionality of all BSIP which are configured as IEEE1588 Sync Slaves depends on the availability
185. eways gt Dect Network 0 000 cee eee ren 113 4 7 2 5 WBM gt Media Gateways gt IWU Network 00 0 eee es 116 4 7 2 6 WBM gt Media Gateways gt CL Network 0 00 00 cece eee eee 117 4 7 2 7 WBM gt Media Gateways gt About 00 ccc hs 118 4 7 2 8 WBM gt Media Gateways gt VoIP Network 2 0 00 0c eee n 119 4 7 2 9 WBM gt Media Gateways gt VoIP Gateway l i res 120 4 7 2 10 WBM gt Media Gateways gt Phonebooks 0000 eee ete eee 122 4 8 Group Configuration IWU 0 2 0 0 RR hrs 123 4 8 1 General Group Configuration liiis n 124 4 8 2 Configuration Page Group 2 0 rh 124 4 9 Users Configuration IWU 0 0 0 6 Rh rh 128 4 9 1 General user configuration liiis 129 4 9 1 1 User Management Options 00 0 0 rs 129 4 9 1 2 User Search Options 0 0 2 0 0c ers 132 4 9 2 Configuration Page User User 0 2c n 133 4 9 3 Configuration Page User VoIP 0 teens 135 4 9 4 Configuration Page User Dect 0 0 0 m 136 4 10 Dect Configuration IWU 0 0 0 RR rr hr 138 4 10 1 General DECT Configuration 00 00 tte ee tees 139 4 10 1 1 Adding Deleting and Scanning s s s sasaaa cect eee 139 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base 1 20 inte eens 142 A31003 C1010 M100 3 7620 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 5 Contents 4 10 3 Configuration Page Dect
186. f the WBM of the BSIP IWU is not accessible anymore there is no possibility to correct the error by changing the IP configuration locally In contrast to common VoIP phones which only have one registration at the PBX the HPCIP registers several users at the PBX Errors in the IP configu ration of the IWU impact ALL user registration of the IWU Taking all the circumstances into account the implementation of the DHCP client at the IWU was realized in the following way The Default state of DHCP is disabled The DHCP client at the HPCIP IWU cyclically send a DHCP Request DHCP may only be activated for the Infrastructure network The IP configu ration of the DECT network has to be done manually with a fixed IP address Ifthe DHCP client received a valid DHCP lease from a DHCP server these values will overwrite the manual IP configuration of the infrastructure network 5 2 1 Implementation Detail for Deactivated DHCP If DHCP configuration was deactivated when the system booted the following rules apply The manual configured IP configuration will be used After activating the button Network State a DHCP request will be initiated The result of the request will be displayed after a specific timeout in the output window independently of the DHCP state enabled or disabled e If the DHCP request has been answered by a DHCP server DHCP LEASE the assigned values are displayed otherwise a timeout message will app
187. figu ration purposes but doesn t uniquely identify a MGW MGW Type Determines the type of the Media Gateway Four different types are available MGW 30 Supports up to 30 concurrent calls MGW MGW 60 Supports up to 60 concurrent calls MGW MGW 90 Supports up to 90 concurrent calls MGW MGW 120 Supports up to 120 concurrent calls MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Media Gateways Dect Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Syslog A specific Syslog server configures at page WBM gt Network gt Group Server may be assigned to a specific Media Gateway One Syslog server may be assigned to several MGW s Mac Addr This field displays the MAC address of the Media Gateway as read from the MGW with Scan Alive Timeout This parameter determines the timeout in seconds a MGW is treated Offline after no data has been received by the Control or Signaling connection 4 7 2 3 WBM gt Media Gateways gt Dect This page displays the table of all configured Media Gateways containing the Dect specific configuration Index Enabled Name 1 iv MOGwW Berlin 1 2 v MGVV_Berlin_2 3 iv MGN Ulm ARI exc FPS Site Id Site Subld PLI Segments RPNs LAL System Default Tpui 1 1b2 c 4 1 1 31 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 00000000 1 1b2 c 4 1 2 31 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 00000000 101b2fc 4 2 1 31 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 00000000 The
188. figured values of CFNRy are used to forward a waiting call after the amount of time if the second call is not answered or rejected The timeout for CFNRy may be configured for values from 0 to 30 seconds Depending on the PBX used very short timeouts e g up 4 seconds may be without functionality Therefore it is recommended to use a smallest value of five seconds To ensure proper functionality test the call forward functionality afterwards e CFNRc If the called handset does not respond by air within 12 seconds the call is being forwarded to the CFNRc destination but not until the 12 seconds have been elapsed All user specific CF settings are stored as part of the backup file Therefore a restore of a backup file will overwrite the current user specific CF settings e lfauseris added to the IWU and a VoiceMail number for the users group is configured this number will be used for this user as the default Call Forward destination Changing the Voicemail number at the WBM later has no influence on the default Call Forward number of already configured users 5 12 1 Technical Background Information The user specific Call Forward mechanism is handled by the IWU For a call forward case the incoming INVITE message will be answered with SIP message 302 MOVED TEMPORARILY The PBX is responsible to handle the further call forward scenario A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 219 Fea
189. for about 1 minute by the OS see output of netstat If the system services are started more precise if the RAS register is starting if the ports are occupied already this will lead to an infinite RAS DOWN condition if DNS SRV is configured the corresponding PBX will be put in the penalty box To overcome this situation wait about 2 minutes between Stop and Start of the system services 5 23 Handset Specific Issues 236 User specific PINs supported The PIN is stored on a per user basis The user specific PIN is not visible Therefore it is possible to change the SystemPIN later without the need to register each handset again with the new pin During the update process to V1RA the global DECT PIN is additionally copied to each user entry Auto entry user are not generated anymore Due to the changes for user specific PIN support Auto Entry users are not generated anymore e SIP Call limiting per user To protect the SIP stack from bulk SIP signaling messages the max number of parallel SIP messages which would trigger a new call e g INVITE will be limited to three e Service Menu If the handset is in one of the service menus e g Call List the menu will be automatically closed by an incoming call and the call is signaled at the handset A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions System Startup Procedure 5 23 1 Handling of Idle Display The Idle
190. g a DNS poll cycle the last DNS list received by the DNS servers is used instead 5 7 4 Penalty Box If the communication with a SIP server fails timeout or server error messages the IP address of this SIP server gets into the penalty box for 10 minutes and the next prior IP address of the DNS server record list is used for registration and call setup After 10 Minutes the IP address is back for that specific SIP gateway This address will be used for each new Re Register message and for each new INVITE message for all handsets assigned to this SIP gateway active calls are not affected Therefore active calls are disconnected at least after a RAS_DOWN event for the user Hint The current state of the penalty box may be derived from the output of Network State see chapter 1 0 1 Survivabilty Information 5 7 5 SIP NOTIFY Message in Limited Mode If the connection between a branch proxy and the OSV fails the branch proxy turns into limited mode with reduced feature set To inform the clients in the branch a SIP NOTIFY message is sent to the phones In the case of HPCIP A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SIP Survivability system there will be no indication in the handsets in idle mode about the limited mode Since it is necessary in DECT to place a call to write something on the idle Screen performance issues forbid an idle mode display text In
191. g of ext slave and a ParkSync which refers to the Index of the Crosslink to the other MGW Module of type Virt base Virtual Base e n a A synchronization method is not applicable A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 146 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU ext slave See above This module will be automatically configured by the IWU with a sync setting of ext slave and a ParkSync which refers to the Index of the Crosslink to the other MGW after the ext master sync has been configured on the module of type CrossLinkSrv or CrossLinklCli The other modules on this MGW may use this virtual module as the sync source ParkSync ParkSync 3 columns You can choose a module from the select box on which the selected Base Station shall synchronize to synchronization master The Base Station will first try to synchronize to the Base Station in the leftmost ParkSync column If this is not successful or if the synchronization gets lost while in operation the Base Station will try to synchronize to the Base Station in the middle ParkSync column and finally to the rightmost column Only when the synchronization to all 3 entered Base Stations is not successful a synchronized operation and therefore a seamless handover will no longer be possible For 1588 synchronization only ParkSync1 is applicable Normally synchronization over air should be reduced t
192. gtr ene See ey CX el gy e Y Rr er qe Ces ad 175 4 12 4 4 Page Base 1588 1 hrs 178 4 12 5 Configuration Page Status gt RSSI 0 e 180 4 13 System Configuration IWU anaes uaaa aaaea 183 4 14 CLC Configuration Server IWU MGW IWU 0000 tee 185 5 Feature Descriptions a 22e onere Re a TR ee ae a whe eee ee Ta ee ee eae a eee 187 Sh pel l Scere a E N E I ERI IRCIE c T Shee ate nese ant La nae ata Se aT 187 SAA SNMP General rnea ea whew als a Pinte eeractameeeetane ee haat urteiquteiutigxues 187 5 1 2 SNMP Application mode differences 00 cette 187 5 1 3 SNMP Tree View all IWU modes 00 00 cette eens 188 5 1 4 SNMP MIB Tree all IWU modes Root OlD 1 0 00 00 cee 189 5 1 4 1 bsipStatistics Version Root OlD 1 1 1 0 00 00 cece 189 5 1 4 2 bsipStatistics nn Root OlD 1 1 n n 2 14 2 0 eee 189 5 1 5 SNMP Trap Tree all IWU modes Root OID 2 0 00 0 ee 190 5 1 5 1 trBsipOnlineState Root OID 2 1 2 0 0 teens 190 5 1 5 2 TR_BSIP_SyncState Root OlD 2 2 0 0 0 0 0c ees 190 5 1 5 3 TR 10 OVL100 Root OID 2 3 0 0 n 191 5 1 6 SNMP Tree View MGW IWU mode sssssssesseses mn 192 5 1 7 SNMP MIB Tree MGW IWU mode Root OID 1 llli 193 5 1 7 1 bsipStatistics Version Root OlD 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 c eee 193 5 1 7 2 bsipStatistics MgwIndex Root OlD 1 1 2 0 0 0 193 5 1 7 3 bsipStatistics nn Root OI
193. he WBM of the BSIP IWU switch to configuration page Dect Ari Dect Ari Ari L Modul Ena Name Segment Segmen Rpn 1 001 7 BslplwuLocal 1 RPN1 15 1 1 2 002 V Bslp Room 2 012 1 RPN1 15 2 2 9 Select the newly created entry for BSIP Only and change the content of the following fields Rpn necessary Change the Rpn for the selected first entry from 0 to 1 if needed Hint The HPCIP System automatically suggests a valid RPN A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 61 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Note When using several Base Stations they have to be configured with a unique Rpn different from 0 Valid RPNs for a class B Ari are 1 255 Using the same RPN as the DECT module number Index is very feasible 10 At the WBM of the BSIP IWU switch to configuration page Dect About Dect About Ll Mo Ena Name Type Basestati Version Hw Partinfot Partin IpAddr Module Ip amp ddr Server Ser Mac Addr 1 001 v BsiplwuLocal BslpLocal 000000000 v4 0 13 Apr 10 2014 08 49 15 5 na n a 192 168 123 1924168123 10500 00 00 00 00 0C 2 002 v BslpRoom 2 Bslp 743085890 V3 34220ct 14 2013 15 23 33 7 V3 3422 Active v3 34 192168 10 204 192 168 10 111 10500 00 1a e8 21 b The fields IpAddr Module and IpAddr Server display the current default values for the selected BSIP1 To apply all the changes to
194. here for the Gateway This name will be displayed in the dropdown box of the available Gateways when configuring the Groups Gateway Type Since several PBX support different feature sets the type of gateway has to be configured A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 98 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference SIP Configuration IWU Gateway Gateway Type OpenScape Voice and or OpenScape Branch OSV OpenScape Office OSO HiPath 3000 default HiPath 4000 default Hint For Gateway Type OSV in limited mode the following applies To ensure consistent behavior to Openstage phones when the system is running in Limited MODE a call transfer to a C participant in Alerting state is not supported ListenPortRemote This entry determines the common SIP listen port of the configured gateway There is no need to change this port to another value than 5060 The default setting is 5060 SIP Server Id The value is equal to the IP address of the VoIP Gateway SIP Server for INVITE and REGISTER Messages It shall be located in the IP Infrastructure network Section 1 3 Network Concept If a domain name is configured the HPCIP system will try to resolve this name into an IP address by means of a DNS query if option Use OBP is deactivated If option Use OBP is activated the name is not resolved by DNS If a DNS request delivers several IP addresses the first IP address in t
195. his column displays the product name of the license option e g HiPath_Cordless_IP V1 feature name This column displays the name of the license option e g Server or Basestation used licenses A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 185 Configuration reference CLC Configuration Server IWU MGW IWU 186 This column displays the currently used number of license units of the corre sponding license option available licenses This column displays the currently available number of license units of the corresponding license option Status This column displays the license state of the corresponding license option Possible states are failure grace period grace period d days left valid valid d days left failover The options in the lower part of the configuration page have the following meaning Use local CLA If this option is enabled the license file will be loaded and stored on the IWU If this option is disabled a remote license server Remote CLA may be configured as license server Remote CLA lp If option Use local CLA is disabled the IP address for the remote license server from which the IWU gathers license information may be configured here Refresh A click of in on this button refreshes the display of all values Load License If option Use local CLA is enabled the license file may be uploaded via a fil
196. his counter displays how often a Online Offline change of the current MGW Control connection has been detected since the start of the system services of the MGW IWU Signal BootCnt This counter displays how often the MGW Signaling connection was lost since the start of the system services of the MGW IWU Signal Online Cnt This counter displays how often a Online Offline change of the current MGW Signaling connection has been detected since the start of the system services of the MGW IWU CC Online Cnt x x 1 5 This counter displays how often an Online Offline change of the Cross Connect to a specific MGW identified by value x has been detected since the start of the system services of the MGW IWU Following values for CC Online Cnt x are defined lt Numeric value gt Number of Online changes X Online Cnt not applicable since CCx SiteSubld of Current MGW lt Empty string gt No Cross connect configured Outgoing Calls This counter displays how often an outgoing connection from a Basestation belonging to the current MGW has been signaled Incoming Calls This counter displays how often an incoming connection from a Basestation belonging to the current MGW has been signaled This counter is also incremented for calls where the connection was not success fully established ExtHo Cnt x x 1 5 This counter displays how often an External Handover from the current MGW identified by Site SiteSubld t
197. his list will be used and all others IP addresses will be ignored The DNS request will be repeated hourly If the IP address is changed by a DNS request this IP address will be used as soon as a user looses his RAS registration or call establishments will timeout Resolve SIP Server Id This setting determines if a hostname which is configured SipServerld and used inside the SIP message headers should be resolved to an ip address or left as configured as name This applies to DNS SRV setups where the OBP has to be disabled and a hostname has to be configured as SIP Server Id as well as to standard DNS setups without DNS SRV where an OBP may or may not be configured If the option Resolve SIP Server Id is enabled which is the default if a name is configured this name will be resolved to an ip address which is used in the SIP message headers If the option Resolve SIP Server Id is disabled non default the configured SipServerld is used in the SIP message headers A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 99 Configuration reference SIP Configuration IWU If adding a new gateway manually the Resolve SIP Server Id will automatically be enabled If the gateway should use an OBP Use OBP enabled the Resolve SIP Server Id has to be disabled manually to preserve the old behavior Use OBP This option is used to control the usage of a SIP Outbound Proxy e g Openscape
198. his option must not be activated during normal productivity operation of the HPCIP system Frequency Selects the frequency of the DECT module the BSIP1 is working with Default 1 88 1 90 for European countries Other Frequencies which are available 1 91 1 92 BRAZ S for country Brazil 1 91 1 93 LAM S for Latin America countries where released Hint The selection of frequencies may be limited to standard EUR frequencies 1 88 1 90 depending on the BSIP hardware used Starting with Hardware Revision 13 Q number of BSIP1 the Deviation registers 3 and 4 of BSIP1 are adjusted for LAM frequencies as part of the production process In former hardware versions no adjustment was imple mented Therefore no LAM Dect frequencies were supported and functional Starting with HPCIP V1R4 5 0 the IWU has to ensure that only BSIP1 with hardware version 13 and higher may be initialized using the BRAZIL frequencies The HPCIP scans the Hardware revision of each activated BSIP and checks if Dect frequency 1 91 1 92 BRAZ S is selected If a hardware version smaller than 13 was detected for this Dect module a validation error will be generated A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 4 10 4 Configuration Page Dect Sync On this configuration page the synchronization of the Base Stations as well as the Virtual Bases are conf
199. his route the other IP network e g 192 52 109 0 may be configured Network Mask available only in application mode BSIP IWU or Server IWU Using this field the corresponding network mask for this route the Network destination e g 255 255 255 0 may be configured Gateway available only in application mode BSIP IWU or Server IWU Using this field the IP address of the gateway inside the VoIP Infrastructure network which handles the routing to a additional network defined by Network destination and Network Mask above may be configured here HTTPS Enable Determines if https Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer should be used for WBM communication between the browser and the IWU Using https encrypts the communication between the browser and the WBM It is suggested to use https mode Depending on the http access mode you have to use http or https mode at the browser HTTPS Enabled use http Server Ip IP of VoIP Infrastructure Network HTTPS Enabled X use https Server Ip IP of VoIP Infrastructure Network Example https 192 168 201 114 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 91 Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU 92 Hint Using https simply uploading a firmware file on a BSIP IWU will take up to 1 minute transfer time Tos Value available only in application mode BSIP IWU or Server IWU With the
200. honebook supports the usage of a Phonebook Prefix Therefore it is possible to use standard telephone numbers inside the Phonebook without the need of prepending a special Dial Prefix to each number in the import file Ifa Phonebook Prefix is configured the Phonebook prefix is prepended to the Dial String if the Telephone Number contains more digits than the Intern CallLen If the Phone Number is equal or less the InternCallLen it is treated as aninternal number and therefore no prefix is used e The configured phonebook prefix applies only to the System phonebook and the LDAP phonebook The handsets local phonebook is not affected by the phonebook prefix Amaximum of 400 phonebook entries are supported e The first line of the Phonebook Configuration File will be ignored The first column AbbreviatedDialing is without functionality e The maximum number of characters of a phonebook name entry is limited to 30 otherwise the phonebook import process will not be successful The handsets may only display 15 characters of the phonebook name entry To delete a phonebook simply overwrite it with an valid phonebook file with following entries 0 X 5 18 1 Sample Phonebook Configuration File AbbreviatedDial optional Phonenumber mandatory Name mandatory max 30 chars 0731123456789 Clooney George 0897007123456 Schiffer Claudia 0897007123457 Depp Johnny Hint All Phone Number entries provided in the Phonebook w
201. iPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 73 Configuration reference WBM overview IWU Info Validation details Module Code Lvl WO063 1 n BsIp Room 2 012 enabled has the wrong server ip address W0099 1 T BsIp Room 2 012 IpAddrFromModul 192 168 10 204 IpAddrToModul 192 168 10 2 Wolo0 1 ad BsIp Room 2 012 IpAddrServerFromModul 192 168 10 111 IpAddrServerToModul 192 168 10 1 WO063 occured 1 times W0099 occured 1 times WO100 occured l times total warnings Each Warning or Error contains a specific Warning or Error Id e g W0035 Warning Id 0035 At the end of the output a summarization of Warnings and Errors is displayed If only some WARNINGS are detected the configuration will be saved If ERRORS are detected the configuration is not saved In this case observe the ERROR messages in the debug window and apply the necessary changes to the configuration and initiate a new Apply process and repeat this step until no ERRORS are displayed A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 74 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Administration BSIP Only 4 2 Administration BSIP Only On the Administration page of the BSIP Only administrative configuration and information about the BSIP1 is provided HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe e 192 168 1 1 html wbm
202. ia Gateways VoIP Network VoIP Network Index Enabled Name IpAddr Netmask VLAN Id Tos Value Cos Value 1 v MGW Berlin 1 192 168 100 81 255 255 255 0 1 Best Effort 0x00 0 Media Gateways 001 MGVY_Berlin_1 wA The table contains the following columns A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 119 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 120 Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name This field displays the name of the Media Gateway IpAddr Displays the IP address of the VoIP network of the Media Gateway This IP address is equal to the ip address and netmask of the corresponding Media Gateway IWU network Netmask Displays the netmask of the VoIP network of the Media Gateway This netmask is equal to the netmask of the corresponding Media Gateway IWU network VLAN Id The corresponding VLAN Id according IEEE 802 1q for the Media Gateway Voip network is displayed here This VLAN ID is equal to the VLAN Id of the corres ponding Media Gateway IWU network ToS Value The ToS value of the Media Gateway Voip network is displayed here COS Value Displays the Cos value of the Media Gateway VoIP network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan The Cos value is equal to the C
203. igured Dect Sync Index Module Number MG Enabled Name Sync ParkSync1 ParkSync2 ParkSync3 2 009 v CL_1 2 n a n a n a n a 5 001 v Bslp 2 001 air 1588 master 003 CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 n a n a 6 002 V Bslp 2 002 1588 slave 001 Bslp 2 001 n a n a 7 003 v CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 ext slave 009 CL 1 2 n a n a The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Module Number MGW Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages A description of these values can be found in chapter 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base Sync Default value air Here you can configure the type of synchronization for the different types of modules physical Base Station BSIP1 CrossLink and VirtualBase with a dropdown box The type of module is displayed at page Dect gt Base gt About gt Type Module of type Bslp e no No synchronization of the Base Station This may be configured if no seamless handover is needed or if this BSIP serves as the Sync Master for air synchronization which is the topmost synchronization source e air Default Synchronization of activated Base Stations over air i e directly via DECT but with additional Status information by the IWU This method occupies depending on the Beacon configuration one or more available timeslots which cannot be used for telephony but it allows the seamless handover between the radio areas of synchr
204. ill be dialed the same way independent of the number of digits in a Phonebook number A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 231 Feature Descriptions RTP Negotiation Part 1 5 18 2 Using the phonebook To use the phonebook simply open the handsets service menu by pressing the left center Inside the service menu select Phonebook If a LDAP phonebook is configured for the user s group a further sub menu will appear Select SystemPhonebook to open the System phonebook If no LDAP phonebook is configured the system phonebook is automatically opened The first three entries of the phonebook are displayed The entries are sorted ascending according the entry name To navigate step by step use the Softkeys A and V To select an entry beginning with a specific letter or digit you may use the alpha numerical keypad Using the keypad keys will select the first entry in the phonebook list which matches the corresponding digit For possible digits refer to Section 8 5 Key mappings for Handset menus After an entry is selected it may be dialed directly by pressing the green off hook key Using the soft key Ok instead will open the phonebook entry and display the name and phone number The display entry may be dialed also by pressing the green off hook key 5 19 RTP Negotiation Part 1 HPCIP only supports a RTP packet rate of 20 msec If SDP parameter don t match to a c
205. in 1 Ip Address 192 168 100 81 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 100 105 VLAN Id ay Cos Value o MGWIwu Ip Address 192 168 100 80 MGW Signal Listen Port 10600 MGW Control Listen Port 10601 The following configuration options are available Name A descriptive name for this MGW is specified here This name will be displayed at the MGW IWU as the MGW name and serves for identification purposes Use only standard characters and omit special characters Umlaut etc Ip Address The ip address of the MGW inside the Media Gateway IWU network is configured here Here you have to configure the IP address at which the MGW should be confi gured inside the Media Gateway IWU network This is also the IP address at which the MGW is accessible via WBM The factory default IP address is 192 168 2 1 This IP address may not be used for further configuration of the MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 87 Configuration reference MGWNetwork MGW 88 Hint The configured IP address may NOT be located inside the DECT network For details refer to Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing Netmask Enter the corresponding netmask for the IP address as configured above Default for Class C networks 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway All routing towards the Media Gateway IWU has to be handled by the default gateway of the Media Gateway IWU network The ip address of
206. individual user entries may be reordered using a drag and drop mechanism 1 Select the user entry that should be moved by pressing the left mouse button User User Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment 1 v 00101 101 Sales 1 2 v 00102 102 Sales 2 3 v 00103 103 Sales 3 4 v 00104 104 Support 1 5 ls V 00105 105 Support 2 6 v 00106 106 Support 3 2 Drag the selected entry to the new designated position User User Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment 1 v 00101 101 Sales 1 2 v 00102 102 Sales 2 3 N V 00103 103 Sales 3 4 05104 104 Support 1 Q1 selected row 5 Iv uurus 105 Support 2 6 v 00106 106 Support 3 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Introduction WBM related issues Hints The entry will be added above the selected entry if the drag direction is upwards The entry will be added below the selected entry if the drag direction is downwards 3 Drop the dragged entry by releasing the left mouse button User User Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment 1 v 00101 101 Sales 1 2 00102 102 Sales 2 4 v 00104 104 Support 1 3 R v 00103 103 Sales 3 5 v 00105 105 Support 2 6 v 00106 106 Support 3 4 Save your changes by clicking the Apply button 1 6 8 Configuration Changes according Service State While system services are running most content of tables are read only since editing d
207. ion backup of a supported version since Linux user password are not parts of the backup A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 67 Configuration reference WBM overview WU 68 4 1 2 Limited Features in WBM mode Unify The following features elements will not be available resp visible in the WBM of the Standard Mode Unify 4 1 2 1 BSIP IWU Server IWU MGW IWU Configuration page Administration Administration gt Button Factory Setting Configuration page SIP SIP gt SIP Settings gt Column Dtmf SIP gt SIP Settings gt Column Packet Size ms SIP gt SIP Settings gt Column Registration expiry SIP gt SIP Settings gt Column Registration threshold SIP gt Survivability whole page Configuration page Media Gateways Media Gateways gt Dect gt Column PLI Media Gateways gt Dect gt Column Segments RPNS LAL Media Gateways gt Dect gt Column Default Tpui Media Gateways gt Dect Network gt Column MGW as GW IWU mode only Media Gateways gt Lower Panel gt Button Delete Media Gateway MGW IWU mode only Media Gateways gt Lower Panel gt Button Replace Media Gateway MGW IWU mode only Media Gateways gt General gt Column Alive Timeout MGW IWU mode only Configuration page Group Group gt Column CF CallForward Enabled Group gt Column CW CallWaiting Enabled Group gt Column VM VoiceMai
208. ion page SIP is divided into several sections HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox DER Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe e 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 122444 432 amp ic 13972118 c 139 8 C E capture mouse pointer P A Dr Yr HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G unire S SIP General General Index Displayl Enabled Name Gateway Type ListenPortRem SIP Server Id Resolve Use OBP Outbound Proxy Netmask 1 1 vj OSV Berlin H OSY 5060 pbx1 dnszone2 iv Pj 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 OSB Munic OSV Be OSV 5060 pbx1 dnszone2 v y 172 32101 255 255 255 0 OSB Stuttgart OSV OSV 5060 pbx1 dnszone2 vj 7 17232414 255 255 255 0 OSO Augsburg oso 5060 172 31 244 1 MI J 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 OSO Ulm oso 5060 192 168 100 50 v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 Add Gateway Delete Gateway Edit Gateway In the table view at the top the VoIP Gateways PBX are configured using several sub pages At the bottom of the page the list of gateways may be edited by adding deleting or editing PBXs A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 97 Configuration reference SIP Configuration IWU 4 6 1 Configuration Page SIP gt General This subpage contains all parameters which are necessary for the General confi guration of the PBX SIP General Gener
209. is deleted Edit Module This button is needed to edit the configuration settings of a BSIP during running system services For details refer to Section 5 20 Dynamic BSIP Changes A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 139 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 140 Replace Module This button is needed to replace a BSIP with another one during running system services For details refer to Section 5 20 Dynamic BSIP Changes Scan This functionality Scan initiates a Seek or Scan of the network for all attached BSIPs using an ip broadcast mechanism All BSIP Only are answering and sending their current configuration information mainly its own IP address the IP address and listen port of the IWU its name and VPN configuration to the IWU where it is displayed For newly scanned BSIPs to which no configuration according the MAC address is assigned a new entry is automatically added Hint The values stored in the configuration of the WBM are overwritten with those found by the SCAN of the corresponding BSIP This fact has to be consi dered especially for the configuration of the name of the BSIP First Scan the BSIP change the name and afterward initiate a Sync Depending on the VLAN configuration of IP Infrastructure and IP Dect network the BSIP Only are only found if they are attached to the appropriate network segment For details refer to optio
210. is displayed in the fields from and to The format of the time frame is Date Event e g 19 01 2011 07 13 11 cleared The following events are available e cleared state has been deleted by clicking on Clear Statistics e inited state has been deleted by a System Update e timediff state has been deleted by setting the system time timezone state has been deleted by changing the Timezone restore state has been deleted by a configuration restore A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU e regular state is valid The following date formats are used dd mm yyyy hh mm ss is used for output of a specific date time e now Indicates that output is displayed up to the current point of time from Displays the start of the time frame for the displayed values to Displays the end of time frame of the displayed values Previous Selects the previous time frame of the status values if available Next Selects the next time frame of the status values if available Absolute Selects an absolute time frame of the status values from the earliest available point of time up to now 4 12 2 Configuration Pages Status gt User Status and User Mibs These two pages contain the status as well as the corresponding Mibs counters for the users The user states are displayed at sub page User
211. is option Timezone If using a Time Server the timezone has to be configured according the physical location of the HiPath Cordless IP solution country Since NTP is always using UTC time the local time has to be calculated against the time zone information to get correct current Local time 4 5 2 Local Server and Group Server Local and Group Servers provide specific services to the IWU like NTP DNS SNMP Syslog Phonebook and LDAP Local Servers are such servers which are functional without assigning them to a specific Group Group Servers are such servers which have to be assigned to a specific group 4 5 2 1 General Server Configuration Button Add Server To add a new Server entry click on Add Server A new entry line with default values is appended which have to be modified according to your needs The new entry line is either inserted above the selected Group or inserted at the top of the list if no Group is selected Button Delete Server To delete a Server entry select the entry and click on Delete Server For details and impact of changes during running system services refer to Section 2 12 5 Dynamic Configuration Changes A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 93 Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU 94 Button Edit Server To edit a Server entry during running system services select the entry and click on Edit Server The C
212. is panels hide disabled users If this option is enabled disabled users are not displayed at all users with active calls only Only those users are displayed which have an active call users with dect location only Only those users are displayed which are Dect located Home users only Only those users are displayed whose Home MGW is configured to the selected MGW or who have or had an active call or a Location at the selected MGW all users Normally only those users are displayed whose Home MGW is configured to the selected MGW or who have or had an active call or a Location at the selected MGW To overcome this restriction enable the option to display all users A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Status User Status coer to Ue as SR aI R ase RSS In Msn 0 09 WN 001 001 001 001 001 001 001 DisplayNa 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 Home MGV 001 MGV _Berlin_1 001 MGwv Berlin 1 001 MG Berlin 1 001 MGW Berlin 1 001 MGW _Berlin_1 001 MGwv Berlin 1 001 MGW Berlin 1 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 4 12 2 2 Configuration Page Status User Status VOIPLoco DECT Loc DECTLoc DECT Callo DECT Call o VOIP IP Voip sta Call states CaSync TsSync 001 MGW 001 MG 002 Bslp 001 MGWv 002 Bslp 192 158 100 50 Rasup Connected out 4 3 001 MGW 001
213. isplay MaxLen 10 Description Determines the second field of the search result Description DisplayDescription2 Attribute Determines the field name where data should be retrieved from Attribute givenName A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 225 Feature Descriptions LDAP Phonebook 226 5 14 4 2 Sample for Windows Directory service LdapConfigGlobal LdapServerName LDAPServerAD LdapSearchRootDN cn Users dc acme dc de MaxSearchResultNum 30 PhoneNumberAttrName telephoneNumber LdapConfigSearch Description SearchDescription Attribute cn LdapConfigDisplay MaxLen 15 Description DisplayDescription1 Attribute cn 5 14 5 LDAP information The output of Network State section LDAP status on page Administration displays further information about the current LDAP status Output of section Description 1Ht LDAP status 1Ht LDAPServerOSO Ip Address 192 168 100 30 Status online data available The section contains the name of the LDAP server as defined in the map file The current ip address of the configured ip address is also shown Server is Online and data is available The HPCIP LDAP search is fully functional LDAP status LDAPServerOSO Ip Address 192 168 100 30 Status online no data available Server is Online but no data is available e g the LDAP Server doesn t deliver LDAP entries dut to several possibl
214. istics 03 4 bsipStatistics 13 14 omitted bsipStatistics 14 15 bsEntry14 1 Index bsIndex 14 R Integer32 bsIndex 14 1 Range 0 32000 R String bsFrom 14 2 R String bsTo 14 3 R String bsRPN 14 4 R String bsMAC 14 5 R String bsName 14 6 R String bsOVL70 14 7 R String bsOVL100 14 8 R String bsRoaming 14 9 bsipTraps 2 trBsipOnlineState 1 trBsipSyncState 2 trBsip100v1100 3 trBsip 4 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 188 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SNMP R String trBsipMAC 1 R String trBsipName 2 R String trBsipEvent 3 R String trBsipSeverity 4 5 1 4 SNMP MIB Tree all IWU modes Root OID 1 The Root OID is assigned the OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 36378 All MIBS bsipMibs are located inside the OID Root OID 1 n 5 1 4 1 bsipStatistics Version Root OID 1 1 1 This MIB has a dual purpose function This value Integer has to be queried by a SNMP manager to refresh the content of the IWU counters into the SNMP counter tables The SNMP object name is bsipStatistics Version the OID is Root OID 1 1 1 5 1 4 2 bsipStatistics nn Root OID 1 1 n nz2 14 The SNMP MIBs provide statistical data of the IWU one table per day to retrieve them by SNMP queries A maximum of 14 statistical tables for the last 14 days are stored Ther
215. istration Backup Config An update may be performed only if the partitions of all enabled BSIP are synchronous to the current partition of the IWU Otherwise the BSIP have to be updated manually or have to be synced using the SYNC button and after wards have to be booted into the same system partition by rebooting the IWU The software update may be conducted during running system services Due to limited resources at the BSIP IWU it may be required depending on system load and current call situation to stop the system services before starting the system update Update instructions d 82 Please create a backup of the old configuration Page Registration Backup Config Ensure that you have a firmware file of the old version available in case of a necessary downgrade Start with the update for the IWU All enabled BSIP are updated automatically After finishing the update process reboot the IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Administration IWU 4 3 2 2 Other options Reboot Board After clicking the button Reboot Board a dialog appears where you have to select the partition which should be active after the reboot The current partition number is displayed separately see Active System 2 in this example The WBM renders the contents of the buttons according the following scheme The left button always contains th
216. k In this field the corresponding network mask which is assigned to the Server Ip address is configured The default value for a Class C network is 255 255 255 0 This configuration example uses the network mask 255 255 255 0 Please refer to Section 6 1 Free IP Addressing 3 Select the configuration page Media Gateways Dect Media Gateways Dect Index Name ARI excl FPS FPS PLI System Pin i1 MgywLocal 101hb2ff 7 31 87654321 ARI excl FPS FPS In the fields ARI excl FPS and FPS the System ARI DECT ID which has to be unique at each DECT system has to be configured The SystemAri is provided by the system implementer Supported System Ari classes are Class B Ari A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Hint All handset registrations are bound to a specific System ARI If the System ARI is changed all handsets loose their registration at the IWU To achieve system functionality the handsets have to be registered again at the IWU ARI excl FPS 101b2ff FPS 7 This configuration example uses the System ARI 101b2ff7 System Pin The PIN is a 8 digit number and it is needed for the registration of handsets It is preconfigured with 00000000 and may be configured systemwide here You can change the system pin to another decimal value This configuration example uses the System Pin 87654321 4 Appl
217. l Enabled Group gt Column VM Number VoiceMail Group gt Column CC CallCompletion Enabled Group gt Column CCBS MSN Busy CallCompletion A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference WBM overview IWU e Group gt Column CCNRy Msn NoReply CallCompletion e Group gt Column CC DeleteAll Msn CallCompletion Group gt Column CPU Call Pickup Group Enabled Group gt Column CPU Msn Call PickupGroup Configuration page User e User gt Voip gt Column G729 User gt Voip gt Column SC Silence Compression Configuration page Dect e Dect gt Lower Panel gt Button Edit Module e Dect gt Lower Panel gt Button Replace Module Dect gt Lower Panel gt Button Fw Download Dect gt Radio gt whole page e Dect gt Ari gt Column Cipher e Dect gt Call gt whole page Dect gt Debug gt whole page Configuration page Debugging Debugging whole page 4 1 3 Login to WBM 4 1 3 1 Multiple WBM sessions If you login onto the same WBM session on which another user was logged on you are informed about that by a message box There is another user logged in do you want to disconnect the currently logged in user OK will logout the currently connected user Cancel Go back to the Login dialog After a timeout of 30 minutes after the last WBM access the user will be logged out automatically b
218. less IP Administrator Documentation 207 Feature Descriptions SIP Survivability 208 If DNS SRV is activated the HPCIP uses the fully qualified domain name in the SIP Server Id field to send a DNS SRV request for a service SIP and the protocol name UDP The answer contains a prioritized list of hosts FQDN providing the service If the hosts are not already resolved to an IP address in the same DNS SRV response HPCIP needs to perform an A record lookup for these hosts The DNS SRV request will be repeated each hour If the DNS response contains a Time to live parameter this value will be used for the refresh timer If the HPCIP system detects a failure in the communication with the SIP server the next IP address in the SIP server record list is used In the WBM the status page Calls Dect is updated to show the IP address actually used for REGISTER and INVITES in case of an active call and the list of SIP server ID addresses resolved with DNS SRV IP addresses in the penalty box are marked see output of Network state The number of IP addresses that can be used out of a DNS SRV answer is limited to 5 Important note If using DNS SRV the whole system functionality mainly depends on the availability of the configured DNS servers If the DNS servers are not reachable during start of HPCIP system services the gateways confi gured with DNS SRV are not functional at all If the DNS servers are not functional durin
219. ling of BSIP update partition sync at Server IWU or BSIP IWU If the BSIP are correctly preconfigured and if network connectivity to the Media Gateway IWU is confirmed all further Config is accomplished centrally at the Media GW IWU Therefore the MGW tries to contact the MGW IWU at the configured IP address ports cyclically If the network connection is established the MGW IWU is aware of the newly attached Media GW due to the signaled information from the MGW to MGW IWU The MGW may be differentiated by their MAC address which is part of the signaled information as similar to the existing process of differentiating the BSIP A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Installation Process At the MGW IWU the new Media Gateway may be scanned and if the signaled information is available at the IWU the MGW is added to the list of available MGW s Hint A MGW is identified uniquely by its MAC address and not by the name Therefore if the HW of MGW has to be replaced it has to be configured with same settings The old MGW if already existing has to be detached from the network After the new MGW is known by the IWU it is displayed at the MGW IWU and may be replaced using the same concept as used for replacing BSIP 2 11 2 Update Concepts A centralized update of Media Gateways from Media Gateway IWU is not supported Update of MGW and Basestations is
220. ll Control 3PCC 216 3rd party call control SPCC will be used for CTI applications where a call may be dialed from the CTI software on the PC instead of dialing from the handset directly Therefore a CTI client is needed which is supported by the PBX Examples for CTI clients are myPortal for OSO and OpenScape WebClient for OSV To use CTI software no specific configuration at the IWU is needed The following CTI clients were tested myPortal for OSO and WebClient for OSV Important note The support of HPCIP 3rd party call control 3pCC feature is limited to initiate an outgoing call and to release a call All other call scenarios which may be offered by the 3pCC software may work but are not supported When the user initiates a call on his PC the PBX first establishes a call to the user s phone incoming call A party with a called ID system When the A party goes off hook the call changes the state to an outgoing call and the PBX starts to establish the second call leg to the B party When the call is established all call features for an A Party call can be used In opposition to a standard call scenario where the calling user initiates an outgoing call the calling user receives an incoming call from the CTI PBX first After the A user accepts the call the further call flow and handling of HPCIP doesn t differ from a standard call Important note The call to the second user is not established until the A
221. llow direct IP communication between the IWU and the PBX both devices have to be located in the same IP network Therefore it is necessary to adapt the IP address of the IWU to the network of the VoIP Infrastructure You need at least one unused IP address of the Infrastructure network which has to be confi gured at the IWU 1 Select the configuration page Network Gateways 2 Change the configuration in the bottom frame to the designated values of the IWU Network Destination 0 0 0 0 Tos Value Best Effort 0x00 w Timezone GMT 01 00 Ams v Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Cos Value 0 v Gateway 0 0 0 0 VLAN Id 0 HTTPS Enable oO Change the following values according your needs Ip Address Here you have to configure the IP address at which the IWU should be available inside the VoIP Infrastructure Network This also is the address at which the BSIP IWU is accessible via WBM This configuration example uses the IP address 192 168 100 1 Network Mask Enter the corresponding network mask for the IP address as configured above Default for Class C networks 255 255 255 0 This configuration example uses the network mask 255 255 255 0 Routing Configuration If routing to another network is necessary e g access from Maintenance PC to IP VoIP Infrastructure network or if infrastructure components e g PBX NTP or SNMP servers are located behind other routers routing may be configured using a Default Gateway
222. location segment If the destined base station is located in the same location segment a handover cannot be established This behavior is known as the modulo problem A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 243 Feature Descriptions Dect Fundamentals The same applies to the MGW concept of HPCIP A handover between MGW inside the same site is only possible if the destined bases station is located in another location segment If the destined base station is located in the same location segment a handover cannot be established Therefore the configuration of the LAL and the corresponding location segment RPN of the basestations have to be considered in the site survey to avoid the modulo problem The installer has to ensure that basestations inside the same location segment of MGWx are geographically separated by the basestations inside the same location segment of MGWy 5 28 4 MGW specific fundamentals for Roaming A DECT ARI is built by several Dect entities For details refer to Dect specification part 6 ETSI EN 300 175 6 The belonging Dect entities are ARI ARC ARD EIC FPN FPS PLI In the new concept the ARI determines the roaming capability of a handset and a e configuration option determines the roaming authorization of a handset The HPCIP system uses a fixed PLI of 31 This means that roaming and handover is limited to the same ARI Important Note As a prerequisite
223. ls from any IP addresses Usage of this option is needed if the IWU is directly connected to geographically node separated OSV cluster Main Office no OpenBranch Proxy involved For security reasons this flag should only be enabled in a Geo separated OSV setup Registration expiry The Registration expiry determines in conjunction with the Registration threshold when a Re register event of the SIP user should be initiated The default is 120 sec min value is 60 sec A SIP Reregister event will be triggered by one of the following events which occurs later after 50 of the Registration expiry have elapsed or if the Registration threshold Registration expiry Registration threshold has been elapsed A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 101 Configuration reference SIP Configuration IWU Therefore the event which occurs later determines the effective Re Registration value Registration threshold The Registration threshold determines in conjunction with the registration expiry when a reregister event of the SIP user should be initiated The default is 2 sec min value is 2 sec The Registration threshold event is triggered at Registration expiry Regist ration threshold 4 6 3 Configuration Page SIP gt Survivability This subpage contains all parameters which are necessary for the Survivability configuration of the PBX mainly DNS
224. lue Description Name trBsip100vl100 OID Root OlD 2 3 Description This trap is triggered if the OVL100 counter has been triggered for more than 10 times within the current day Value Description trBsipMAC MAC address of the associated BSIP trBsipName Name of the associated BSIP trBsipEvent Possible events are OVL100 trBsipSeverity The assigned severity value is 2 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 191 Feature Descriptions SNMP 5 1 6 SNMP Tree View MGW IWU mode hpcipMib 36378 eee bsipStatistics 1 R String bsipStatistics Version 1 R Integer32 bsipStatistics MgwIndex 2 bsipStatistics 0 1 3 for information refer to chapter below bsipTraps 2 for information refer to chapter below NONE mgwStatistics 1 R String mgwStatistics Version 1 mgwStatistics 01 2 mgwEntry 1 1 Index mgwIndex 01 R Integer32 mgwIndex 01 1 Range 0 32000 R String mgwFrom 01 2 R String mgwTo 01 3 R String mgwMgwIndex 01 4 R String mgwMAC 01 5 R String mgwName 01 6 R String mgwOVL70 01 7 R String mgwOVL100 01 8 Hint Output of mgwStatistics 02 3 bsipStatistics 13 14 omitted mgwStatistics 14 15 mgwEntry14 1 Index mgwIndex 14 R Integer32 mgwIndex 14 1 Range 0 32000 R String mgwFrom 14 2 R String mgw
225. ly from the MGW Specific MGW related MIBS may be provided centralized by the MGW IWU 2 12 2 1 Synchronization between MGW inside the same Site Besides existing synchronization of Basestations inside a Media Gateway which is fundamental for seamless handover handover between Media Gateway inside the same site is supported Hence a new sync mechanism was introduced which handles the synchronization between Media Gateways Inter Media Gateway Synchronization Since the DECT networks of the Media Gateways have to be separated by VLAN or separate Ethernet segments using 1588 as the sync method between Media Gateways inside a site is not an option Therefore the concept of Inter Media Gateway Synchronization has to be based on Dect synchronization by air Background information As a precondition for air synchronization to work all participating Base Stations require Dect specific information about their sync partners e g beacon traffic and RSSI information to handle the movement of the sync signal This information which is being exchanged between IWU and the BSIP is transmitted over Ethernet DECT network Therefore this infor mation is IP based and not exchanged by air Since the exchange of this information between the Media Gateways inside a site is necessary a Virtual Dect Module as well as a CrossLink is defined which handles the exchange of this information between the Media Gateways These module types are solely responsibl
226. ministrator Documentation Configuration reference Debugging Configuration IWU The amount of Logfile data will be automatically increased for the HPCIP Server solution This strategy is used if the partition size of mnt conf partition is gt 600MB Instead of 5 Logfiles with 1 MB each the server Logfiles are extended to 25 Logfiles with 20 MB each Note Please note that depending on the activated Logging configuration big amounts of data may be produced which may have negative influence on the performance of the IWU Software and the System Therefore you should only activate Logging functions when requested by a support engineer The options of the table have the following meaning Disable Default value Deactivated When activating this entry the logging functionality for the selected entry is disabled independent of the configured Debug level Name fixed Preconfigured descriptive name of the Software level for which the Debug level is valid You will get more detailed information from our support engineer when the activation of a Debug level is requested Level Default value 0x00000000 Debug level of the selected entry The value may be entered directly hexadecimal or via the checkboxes on the right DefaultDebug Enabling the checkbox in this column activates the Default Debug for the corres ponding debug module DefaultDebugExt Enabling the checkbox in this column activates the Default Debug Extended for
227. mits Partial Call Limit Maximum Call Limit Max no of G 729 calls Max no of G 711 calls Max no of calls 6 0 6 7 7 9 10 10 10 m C o O joo oj rn 1 0 eo e Hint The values inside this table are valid for a BSIP IWU which sync confi guration is No sync AIR Slave or AIR Master Examples for call Control Limits 5 x G729 calls and 1 x G 711 call are already active A further call is limited to G 711 since a possible combination of 6 x G 729 and more than 0 x G 711 calls is not supported see table 5 x G 729 calls and 2 x G 711 calls are already active A further call is rejected since the Maximum call limit 7 for this codec combination is reached 4 x G 729 calls and 2 x G 711 calls are already active A further call may be estab lished using G 729 since a combination of 5 x G 729 and 2 x G 711 calls is supported see table 3 x G 729 calls and 5 x G 711 calls are already active A further call is limited to G 711 since a combination of 4 x G 729 and more than 3 x G 711 calls is not supported see table 2 x G 729 calls and 7 x G 711 calls are already active A further call is limited to G 711 since a combination of 3 x G 729 and more than 6 x G 711 calls is not supported see table Hint Running a BSIP IWU with a high number of BSIP Only 55 and a high number of configured users gt 30 configured users while having a maximum amount of
228. n IWU Configuration reference Group Configuration IWU On the configuration page Group the Groups are defined which provide the connection between the VoIP Users and the Gateways on a peer MGW base Additionally specific properties may be configured on a per group base which may be applied to one or several users depending on their group assignment HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 132759 337 amp ic 1397215679642 ic 1397215 i HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G i Enabled Name v OSV Branches V OSV Headquar v Grp Ulm OSO Add Group Delete Group MediaGW List HomeMediaGV In CF Call CW Cal YM Voi 123 001 MGW Berlin 12 001 MG Berlin 3 003 MGW Ulm Edit Group NM 85382 85382 71 CC Call v v CCBS CCNR CCD 30 31 30 30 Due to the enhanced MGW concept the concept of assigning Groups to Gateways differs between BSIP IWU Server IWU and MGW IWU BSIP IWU Server IWU Since only one MGW MGW Local exists the groups may be assigned directly to a SIP Gateway MGW IWU Since several MGW s may exist the groups cannot be assigned to a gateway directly Instead the assignment has to be done MGW specific That means a specific assignment on a per MGW base between group
229. n VLAN Id of the Voip Infrastructure network at Section 4 5 1 General Network Configuration and of the DECT network at Section 4 7 1 2 Media Gateways gt Dect Network BSIP IWU and Server IWU Hint If communication specific options of a BSIP are changed at the IWU a Sync process has to be established Otherwise the formerly active IP address of the BSIP will be still displayed If newly added BSIP are not found using SCAN repeat the SCAN process with stopped system services Otherwise take note of the hints described at chapter Section 7 1 1 BSIP Only Not Found Using Scan Sync This functionality Sync initiates the transmission of the relevant configuration data mainly its own IP address the IP address and listen port of the IWU its name and VPN configuration from the IWU to all enabled BSIP Only Q Setting Ip address of all enabled Devices and reboot them if IpAddr differ Continue A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU Fw Download This button is needed to update the firmware of one or several BSIP during running system services For details refer to Section 5 20 Dynamic BSIP Changes Media Gateways Using this dropdown a specific Media Gateway has to be selected All infor mation on these pages is than related to the assigned modules of the selected MGW No new modules on scan only in
230. n Assigned TPUI may be required by some 3rd party Dect devices to be fully interoperable with other DECT systems or HPCIP 2 Guarantee the uniqueness of TPUI The Default TPUI PMID is built by a prefix e and the last two bytes 4 digits which are derived from the handsets IPUI Due to the IPUI assignment scheme the last two bytes may be used by several handsets In this case the uniqueness of TPUI is broken and IP DECT has to disable those users which will lead to ambiguous TPUls Therefore these users may not be used for telephony functions at all The higher the number of handsets used the higher the proba bility of ambiguous TPUls Therefore if using third party Dect devices or in larger installations it is suggested to switch from Default TPUI mode to Assigned TPUI mode by disabling the checkbox WBM gt Dect Lower Frame gt Default TPUI and restarting the system Hint The current TPUIs used may be derived from the output of the Capiserver Sdm module index pi command in column PMID hex value for connected calls Example output shortened of a Dect call with Default TPUI PMID of HS 00A7C043EB ee5cOdd2 162370 0 0 O21 1 8 3 0 0e43eb Example output shortened of an Dect call with Assigned TPUI User Index 1 0e05codd20000 0 133 7 0 020 3 8 3 000001 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 238 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions V
231. n which will be active after switching to BSIP IWU mode A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 76 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Administration BSIP Only Output of Network State Network configurations of BSIPl ApplicMode BSIP only In Im mode the board would start with the following settings Network Gateway settings Ip Address Network Mask Default Gateway DHCP enabled Dns Server 1 Dns Server 2 Network Destination Network Mask Gateway Tos Value Qos Value VLAN Id Time Server enabled Timezone Time Server Ip DECT settings Server Ip Server Network Mask Listen Port VLAN Id IVU as Gw Dect VPN Enabled Dhcp Boottime Status Actual Status Ip Address Network Mask Default Gateway Dhcp Server Dns Server 1l Dns Server 2 Gateway A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 192 168 2 1 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 FALSE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 FALSE GMT 01 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt 255255040 snp valid 192 168 100 227 255 255 255 0 192 168 100 105 192 168 100 105 192 168 100 105 0 0 0 0 77 Configuration reference Administration IWU 4 3 Administration IWU On the IWU Administration page a centralized administrative configuration and information about the HPCIP system is provided Due to the IWU type us
232. name is not possible If the outbound proxy checkbox is unchecked the IP address in the Outbound Proxy field is ignored In that case the IP address for signaling will be derived from the input in the SIP server Id field If this input is a domain name FQDN DNS is used to resolve the domain name If more than one IP addresses are returned only the first will be used and the other will be ignored The DNS request will be repeated each hour to recognize configuration changes in the network If the IP address of the SIP Server Id changes after a DNS request the new IP address will be used for the next Re Register or if a call setup has failed with a timeout The Re Register timer is here 120 seconds 5 7 2 DNS Administration For system standard name resolution two DNS Servers are configured system wide SYSTEM DNS 1 or SYSTEM DNS 2 at page Network Gateway gt Servers For gateway specific name resolution the System DNS servers as well as several additional DNS Servers may be configured The assignment of a DNS Server to a PBX is accomplished at page Network Gateway gt Survivability 5 7 3 DNS SRV To use DNS SRV outbound proxy mode must be deactivated DNS SRV will be activated with a checkbox for each SIP gateway In that case the input fields for outbound proxy will be ignored The DNS administration for resolving domain names is the same as described above A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cord
233. nce System Configuration IWU 4 13 System Configuration IWU On the configuration page System both software processes of the IWU may be configured started and stopped Click Start to start the enabled processes and Stop to stop them again The current state of the services may be queried by clicking on Refresh Activate Service for both entries if the services should start automatically at system start Other modifications are usually not needed here HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 132759 3378ic 13972156796427ic 1397215 C E lightscreencaptuem d e Dr Wir J HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G Enabled Applic Name Status Up since Service v capigw exe Running 11 04 2014 15 05 v v iwu exe Running 11 04 2014 15 06 v System Start System Stop Refresh The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Enabled Usually both processes are activated This default configuration should only be changed for locating problems after consultation of the support team Applic Name The Name of both IWU processes are displayed here A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 183 Configuration reference System Configuration IWU Status In this column the states of the IW
234. nd a Sync Slave SS BSIP Only premium class switches which fulfill the requirements regarding Ethernet synchronization according IEEE1588 are supported A list of supported switches is documented in the sales information of the HPCIP system Synchronization according IEEE1588 may only be used with a project specific release Details can be found in the release note of HiPath Cordless IP A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 17 Introduction WBM related issues Usage of VLAN at the BSIP IWU for Infrastructure and DECT network is mandatory All participating switches have to be configured in a way that the VLAN of the DECT network has to be assigned the highest priority Further details regarding Ethernet Synchronization according IEEE1588 may be found in chapter 1 5 Synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 1 6 WBM related issues 18 1 6 1 Supported Web Browser The following web browsers are supported e Mozilla Firefox e Microsoft Internet Explorer For details refer to chapter 8 1 Configuration Hints for Web Browser as well as the release notes 1 6 2 General WBM Issues The following special characters are not allowed inside the configuration objects for WBM E T 96 ASC 0 ASC 0x1F Adding or removing of some configuration objects is only supported if Services are stopped e Configuration and firmware files MUST NOT include spaces in their filen
235. ndsets changes from displaying the name to Pickupcall The handset s service menu will be enhanced by a new entry Pickupcall If the C party user steps into the pickup call menu the number of the calling A party is displayed in line 1 and the number of the originally called B party user is displayed in line 2 If the Softkey Ok or the green off hook key is pressed the call will be picked so the current C party user will be connected with the A party If other C party handsets also have been signaled a Pickup call their idle display will be reset to the name by means of service calls 5 17 Call Waiting CW The configuration of CallWaiting 2nd line is accomplished on a group specific base at the WBM WBM gt Group gt CW CallWaiting Enabled If option CW CallWaiting Enabled is enabled the feature CW is generally available for the group users and the corresponding menu for CW will be displayed in the handsets service menu To activate the CW feature at a specific handset it has to be activated on a per user base first Hints To enable CW at the handset the feature CallWaiting 2nd line has to be enabled at the PBX for this user e The Call Waiting tone is defined in Section 8 4 4 Call waiting tone If the CW feature is activated on both the group and at the handset A party and the B party aready have a call established a further incoming call will be signaled optically on the handsets display as well as a
236. neither supported nor are they working trouble free Therefore operation of Server IWU and MGW on a virtualized platform is forbidden Minimum requirements for virtualization Option Setting Configuration Custom Name MGW IWU VM Version Virtual Machine Version 8 Guest OS Linux Other 2 6 x Linux 32 bit CPU Number of virtual sockets 1 Number of cores per virtual socket 2 Memory 4 GB Network No of Nics 1 Adapter type Flexible Assign network type as suggested SCSI LSI Logic Parallel Storage Select an appropriate destination storage depending on your ESXi Configuration Virtual disk size 250 GB Virtual device node SCSI 0 0 0 IDE 0 0 Hint Important IDE has to be used Virtual Disk Size 250 GB 6 6 Installation of MGW IWU system 6 6 1 Base installation onto Server Rx 100 S8 Detailed documentation of core installation of the HPCIP V1R5 software onto the hardware based server Rx100S8 is outside the scope of this document Only the necessary steps are described Download the ISO image of HPCIP Server Install CD and create a bootable CD Boot the server from the Server Install CD V1 R5 x y A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 249 Configuration Techniques Installation of MGW IWU system 250 The core installation of HPCIP V1R5 Server will start automatically without user invention a reboot is i
237. ng To Roaming From Calls CC1 cc2 c 1 1 MGW Berlin 1 1 1 Online Online 11 5 0 0 0 NIA Online 2 2 MGA Berlin 2 1 2 Online Online 0 0 0 Online N A 3 3 MGW Ulm 2n Online Online 0 0 0 0 0 Right part of table Status MGW Status cc 1 cc 2 cc3 cc 4 ccs ExtHO 1 ExtHO2 ExtHO3 ExHO4 ExHOS ControlOnlinelast Control Offline last Signal Online last Signal Offline last N A Online 0 0 0 0 0 10 04 2014 18 46 10 04 2014 18 46 11 04 2014 15 06 N A Online N A 0 0 0 0 0 10 04 2014 18 46 10 04 2014 18 46 11 04 2014 15 06 N A 0 0 0 0 0 10 04 2014 18 46 10 04 2014 18 46 11 04 2014 15 06 N A The columns of the table have the following meaning A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 167 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 168 Index This column displays the index of the current MGW This value is automatically incremented by the WBM DisplayIndex The Display Index of the entry is displayed here This value is automatically incre mented by the WBM Name Displays the name for the MGW as configured Site SiteSubld Displays the compound value of current Site Id and Site Subld as configured for the MGW to uniquely identify a Media Gateway inside a site Control Online This field displays the current state Online or Offline of the Media Gateway Control connection Online if services are running and communication to MGW IWU via the CONTROL connection is est
238. nguage Copied from option Language of the user template Groups Copied from option Groups of the user template UserName Incremented from option UserName of the user template AuthName Incremented from option AuthName of the user template Password Copied from option Password of the user template G729 Copied from option G729 of the user template Further Hints A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 247 Configuration Techniques Downgrading a HPCIP System Ifthe TemplateUser is not assigned a handset already IPUI 00000000 the first DECT Registration of the MultiRegister will be applied to this User e Ifthe TemplateUser is assigned a handset already IPUI does not equal 00000000 the first DECT Registration of the MultiRegister will be applied to the first new user This ensures that an already existing regist ration at the TemplateUser will not be overwritten e If one of the intended auto incremented numbers already exist in the configuration it is omitted automatically After creation of an added user it is registered automatically at the PBX The multi register process is not stopped by a timeout It has to be finished using the CANCEL button 6 4 Downgrading a HPCIP System After a BSIP factory reset has been initiated the factory defaults are restored If a complete HPCIP system IWU and Base Station has been downgraded the following items have to be c
239. nitiated automatically Attach the network to the belonging ETH interface of Rx100 S8 the ETH interface LAN1 at the inner side of the PC The factory default settings to access the WBM of HPCIP server software IWU are VLAN not configured untagged IP address 192 168 2 1 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway n a The HPCIP server software is now operating in Server IWU mode At this point the WBM is accessible via a maintenance PC attached to the same network 6 6 2 Base installation MGW IWU virtualized onto ESXi To run the MGW IWU virtualized specific requirements according the virtuali zation environment have to be fulfilled See Section 6 5 Virtualization of MGW IWU 6 6 2 1 Create virtualized machine environment At the ESXi start the wizard to create a new virtual machine File gt New gt Virtual machine If an option is not documented use the standard default setting of ESXi Option Setting Configuration Custom Name MGW IWU VM Version Virtual Machine Version 8 Guest OS Linux Other 2 6 x Linux 32 bit CPU Number of virtual sockets 1 Number of cores per virtual socket 2 Memory 4 GB Network No of Nics 1 Adapter type Flexible Assign network type as suggested SCSI LSI Logic Parallel A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration Techniques Installation of MGW IWU system
240. ns the Dect Fixed Part Sub number which is a 4 bit 1 digit value containing values from 1 to F Hint The ARI is built of the combined values of ARC EIC FPN FPS Example The ARI 101b2fe1 is segmented into ARC 1 EIC 01b2 FPN fe FPS 1 Important note Please keep in mind that the implementer installer has to ensure that the FMID is geographically unique The FMID is built from the last digit of the ARI FPS Fixed Part Sub Number and the RPN of the base stations If the same FMID is used this may lead to spurious call losses and to instable system behavior if both radio parts of the DECT systems are running synchronous for a specific amount of time For details refer to Dect specification EN 300 175 2 and EN 300 175 6 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Segments RPNs LAL Using this dropdown the number of Location Areas and their corresponding number of RPN Location area as well as the LAL may be configured The dropdown shows 8 possible selections Segments RPNs LAL 255 1 RPNs Loc Area LAL 39 w 2 128 RPNs Loc Area LAL 32 4 64 RPNs Lac Area LAL 33 8 32 RPNs Loc Area LAL 34 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 32 8 RPNs Loc Area LAL 36 64 4 RPNs Loc Area LAL 37 128 2 RPNs Loc Area LAL 38 255 1 RPNs Loc Area LAL 39 The output is arranged into a separated list Num
241. nt 1 into hold and initiate a call to a second user If the second user conference parti cipant 2 is connected a conference between all three parties may be invoked by pressing the Menu and Conference softkey consecutively Hints If the conference initiator disconnects the conference all calls will be discon nected A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 261 Appendix System tones 8 4 System tones 262 If one of the conference participants disconnects the call the conference between the two remaining parties persists The following tones are generated by the IWU and streamed at the handset Please keep in mind that regarding the type and configuration of the used PBX the alerting tone may differ Hint The Ring tone is generated at the mobile phone The mobile phone may be configured to differ ring tones between internal and external calls 8 4 1 Dial tone 0 2 0 2 0 2 H NN HN 0 0 2 3 0 5 Tone definition 0 2 sec Pulse 0 2 sec Pause 0 2 sec Pulse 0 2 sec Pause 0 2 sec Pulse 1 0 sec Pause 9 450 Hz The dial tone is generated at the following scenarios After pressing the Off hook key only if the system supports overlapped dialing as well as e Pressing the R key or the Softkey Hold The dial tone is used to signal the user that the system is ready to accept a number 8 4 2 Calling tone 1 0 EHSEEBERRE HEBEBEHUSH 3 0 T
242. nteger MIB internal index of the MGW mgwFrom nn Text Date time reason of start of the current MIB table mgwTo nn Text Date time reason of stop of the current MIB table mgwMgwlndex nn Text Index of the belonging MGW mgwMAC nn Text MAC address of the associated MGW mgwName nn Text Name of the associated MGW mgwOVL70 nn Text This counter indicates how often 70 or more of the available channels of the MGW had been occupied mgwOVL100 nn Text This counter indicates how often 100 of the available channels of the MGW had been occupied A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SNMP 5 1 9 SNMP Trap Tree MGW IWU mode Root OID 4 The Root OID is assigned the OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 36378 All TRAPS mgwTraps are located inside the OID Root OID 4 n All SNMP TRAPS contain several data which are described here 5 1 9 1 trMgwControlOnlineState Root OID 4 1 Value Description Name trMgwControlOnlineState OID Root OlD 4 1 Description This trap is triggered if the MGW Control Connection changes its state Online Offline Value Description trMgwindex Index of the associated MGW trMgwMAC MAC address of the associated MGW trMgwName Name of the associated MGW trMgwEvent Possible events are ONLINE OFFLINE 5 1 9 2 trMgwSignalOnlineState Root OID 4 2 Value D
243. nts Proper functionality of IP DECT system depends on the underlying networks the System is operating on A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 13 Introduction Network Concept For all networks except the DECT network common requirements for a Voip ready network apply These networks have to be separated from other traffic by means of a specific VLAN For the DECT network higher requirements apply depending on the synchroni zation method used As a minimum requirement a separate VLAN with highest priority in case of LAN Sync is required For details refer to the next sections A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 14 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Introduction Synchronization Over Air Concept 1 4 Synchronization Over Air Concept In contrast to a line based synchronization mechanisms or a network based one synchronization via air requires special requirements Synchronization signal Both synchronization partners are syncing over air This means that the synchro nization signal received by the synchronization client from the synchronization master has to have specific minimum signal strength The theoretical minimum signal strength for the synchronization signal is 85 dB The minimum aspired signal strength for the synchronization signal is 75 dB Synchronization topology For the operation of several synchronized Base Stations several topological approach
244. o another MGW identified by value x inside the same site was detected since the start of the system services of the MGW IWU Following values for ExtHo Cnt x are defined lt Numeric value gt Number of External Handover from current MGW to MGW x X ExtHO Cnt not applicable since x SiteSubld of current MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 171 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 172 Empty string No Cross connect configured Roaming To Cnt This counter displays how often an roaming event change of a Base Station without an active connection from the current MGW to another MGW was detected Hint Handover events Intercell handover during an active call are not consi dered by this counter These events are handles by counter Intercell handover Roaming From Cnt This counter displays how often an Roaming Event change of a Base Station without an active connection from another MGW to the current MGW was detected Hint Handover events Intercell handover during an active call are not consi dered by this counter These events are handles by counter Intercell handover MGW OVL 70 This counter displays how often the MGW has allocated equal or more than 70 of the available channels or streams whatever event comes first MGW OVL 100 This counter displays how often the MGW has allocated 100 of the available channels or streams
245. o only one ParkSync ParkSync1 If further BSIP are configured as ParkSync2 and ParkSync3 which have a low RSSI level of the received sync signal this may lead to counterpro ductive system behavior In no case a fallback synchronization ParkSync2 or ParkSync3 to a BSIP which is physically located behind a BSIP which is already configured as ParkSync1 Please keep in mind that the current BSIP may be selected in the dropdown menu Since this would lead to a sync recursion the local BSIP may not be confi gured as its own ParkSync Important note If a BSIP which is configured as Air Sync Slave looses synchro nization it tries to resynchronize to its configured synchronization Master Base Station ParkSync This process can not start until the last call at the Sync Slave BSIP is released and no other calls are active When referencing to Dect modules in columns Park Sync x x 1 3 the Dect modules are referenced by the local index of the MGW Module Number MGW the Dect Module is assigned to Further information regarding the Synchronization may be found in the following chapters Synchronization over air chapter 1 4 Synchronization Over Air Concept Synchronization over Ethernet chapter 1 5 Synchronization via Ethernet acc IEEE 1588 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 147 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 148 4 10 5 Configuration Page
246. oc Area LAL 36 64 4 RPNs Loc Area LAL 37 128 2 RPNs Loc Area LAL 38 255 1 RPNs Loc Area LAL 39 The output is arranged into a separated list Number of Location Areas Number of RPN Location area Location Area Length LAL System Pin The PIN is a 8 digit number and it is needed for the registration of Handsets It is preconfigured with 00000000 and may be configured on a MGW base here Hint The ciphering method uses the System Pin to cipher the speech connec tions of the handsets on air The System Pin is transmitted to the handset during the registration process If the System Pin is changed later this will lead to disturbed voice connections In this case the handsets have to be reregistered at the IWU Default TPUI Configuration option for compatibility issues with third party Dect devices as well as for large Systems only in WBM mode IkonAdmin available For details refer to Section 5 25 Support of Assigned TPUI instead of Default TPUI By default it is suggested to disable this option in MGW IWU mode 4 7 2 4 WBM gt Media Gateways gt Dect Network This page displays the table of configured Dect networks at all Media Gateways Media Gateways Dect Network Dect Network Index Enabled Name Dect Serverlp Dect Netmask Dect Listen Port YPN en wvLAMId Cos Value 1 v MG Berlin 1 192168 221 254 255 255 255 0 10500 E 221 0 2 v MGW Berlin 2 192 168 222254 255 255 255 0 1050
247. odule This number identifies a module on a specific IWU globally and independent from the assigned MGW The number is assigned by the IWU and cannot be changed Module Number MGW This field contains the relative index number of the DECT module BSIP at a specific MGW The number may be changed manually Name Displays the name of the Base Station Online Yes if the selected Base Station is in state Online No if the selected Base Station is in state Offline Sync Yes if the selected Base Station is in Sync synchronized which means that this base station has synchronized to another base station No if the selected Base Station is DutOfSync unsynchronized which means that this base station has NOT been synchronized to another base station At the base Station which is not synchronized to another base an exclusively Sync Master or no sync configured the value is n a N A if the SYNC state is not applicable to the module type or the sync type e g for a Sync Master A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU State 1588 This counter displays the current state of the 1588 sync mechanism of a 1588 Sync Slave Standard state during runtime is 5 In Sync Boot states are 2 3 4 Drift Initial This counter displays the Initial Drift between the 1588 Sync Slave and its 1588 Sync Master The valu
248. odule address has to be unique and is in the same subnet as the IP address of the InterWorking Unit Server Ip Please not that the IP address of the Base Station is transmitted to the Base Station after a SYNC see chapter 4 10 Dect Configuration IWU MAC Addr In this field the ethernet MAC address of the Base Station is displayed as it is found during a Scan The values cannot be changed 4 10 3 Configuration Page Dect Radio Advanced mode This page is only displayed in Unify Admin mode at the WBM Dect Radio Index Module Number MGV Enabled Name Diversity Ctr Frequency 2 009 v CL 1 2 Fi A 1 88 1 90 5 001 v Bslp 2 001 1 88 1 90 6 002 v Bslp 2 002 1 88 1 90 7 003 v CL 1 2 Bslp 1 002 1 88 1 90 The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Module Number MGW Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages A description of these values may be found in Section 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base Diversity If this option is enabled the antenna diversity feature for the selected BSIP1 is activated The default value is disabled A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 143 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU 144 Ctr6 This option is exclusively needed for specific tests according CTR6 After activation of this feature specified test cases may be initiated T
249. of the IEEE1588 Sync Master If the Sync Master is not functional e g not Online due to Ethernet problems all 1588 sync slaves will go OutOfSync During this time no telephony is possible General requirements on the Ethernet system A maximum number of three cascaded Ethernet switches are supported between the Sync Master SM and a Sync Slave SS BSIP The following figure illustrates a valid and an invalid setup according the 3 switch hop rule Syne Master Syne Slave Syne Slave Sync Slave Sync Slave Syne Slave Syne Slave Syne Master Syne Slave Syne Slave As shown in this figure also a 5 switch setup may be realized by choosing the correct position of the Sync Master inside the switch topology Only premium class switches which fulfill the requirements regarding Ethernet synchronization according IEEE1588 are supported A list of supported switches is documented in the HPCIP Wiki pages at http wiki unify com A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 199 Feature Descriptions Ethernet Synchronization acc IEEE1588 Usage of VLAN at the BSIP IWU for Infrastructure and DECT network is mandatory All participating switches have to be configured in a way that the VLAN of the DECT network has to be assigned the highest priority A maximum jitter value of 700 nsec should be achieved higher values will definitely lead to resynchronizations If the switch supports L3 featu
250. ommon size of 20 msec the call is disconnected by the IWU with SIP reason 415 Unsupported Media Type In version before V1R4 the call was accepted but voice data was missing or distorted from remote side to HPCIP 5 20 Dynamic BSIP Changes 232 Starting with HPCIP V1R4 it is possible to add remove or replace e g due to service issues a BSIP during running system services Therefore no downtime of the system is necessary if a new BSIP has to be added or an existing BSIP has to be exchanged To support these procedures an additional new functionality is available which permits to do a firmware update on a single BSIP The following new WBM elements are available WBM gt Dect gt Button Edit module WBM gt Dect gt Button Replace module A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Dynamic BSIP Changes WBM gt Dect gt Button Fw Download Important note A BSIP Only configured as a 1588 Master cannot be replaced Hint Since possible changes in the synchronization history during dynamic changes of base stations are necessary these may consecutively lead to voice distortion of active calls and possible call disruption for a short period 5 20 1 Dynamic changes Edit module Similar to changes of VoIP users during running services DECT modules may be changed using the Edit module button Modules may be enabled or disabled dynamically All necessa
251. on reference Administration IWU 84 Switching to IWU mode and reboot Press OK to reboot the BSIP1 and start it in the other application mode Important note After changing the application mode the BSIP1 will start with the IP configuration which was configured last for the corresponding appli cation mode This may be the default configuration for the mode 192 168 2 1 or the already configured addresses for the mode Applic Mode BsipOnly only available in BSIP Only WBM To change the application mode of the BSIP1 from BSIP1 IWU to BSIP Only select Applic Mode BsipOnly After changing the application mode the following message box will appear Switch to BsIp mode and reboot Press OK to reboot the BSIP1 and start it in the other application mode Important note After changing the application mode the BSIP1 will start with the default IP setting 192 168 1 1 Applic Mode IWU only available in MGW IWU and MGW WBM To change the application mode of the Server platform from MGW IWU or MGW to Server IWU select Applic Mode IWUJ After changing the application mode the following message box will appear e switching Press OK to reboot the Server and start it in the other application mode or Cancel to stop the reboot process Changing this application mode will initiate a factory reset to the corresponding application mode After reboot the server will start in application mode Server IWU
252. on to clear the Logfiles in the log directory Download Corefiles Use this functionality to download coredump files which may have been created during a crash of the system processes If one of the main system processes of the IWU Setup Application Capiserver or InterWorking Unit terminates contrary to expectations this will lead to loss of System functionality The IWU has to be rebooted to gain system functionality again After reboot has finished the diagnostic data Corefiles of the last crash may be downloaded by clicking on Download Corefiles and transmitted to the support team of the HPCIP system for analysis A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 4 12 Status Configuration IWU On the page Status of the Configuration Utility various status information may be displayed It consists of four sub pages HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 168 100 80 html wbm_pro html session_id 132759 3378ic 13972156796427ic 1397215 C E lightscreen capturemo P A HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY Status Status User Status User Status Index Msn DisplayN Home MG VOIP Loc on DECT Loc DECTLoc DECT Call VOIP IP Voip sta Call states CaSync TsSync 101 001 MGWW
253. one definition 1 0 sec Pulse 3 0 sec Pause 450 Hz The calling tone is used to signal the Calling party the alerting of the Called party A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Appendix System tones 8 4 3 Busy tone 0 5 uu CERNE BEBEH ENERE Tone definition 0 5 sec Pulse 0 5 sec Pause 450 Hz The busy tone is generated at the following scenarios e The Called party is busy as well as After the active call is disconnected by the remote party 8 4 4 Call waiting tone 0 25 3 75 Tone definition 0 25 sec Pulse 3 75 sec Pause 450 Hz The CallWaiting tone is generated at the handset while a call is waiting It is played as long as the CallWaiting is active A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 263 Appendix Key mappings for Handset menus 8 5 Key mappings for Handset menus 264 The following key mappings apply to input characters in the following scenarios e Navigation inside the System phonebook e Navigation inside the LDAP phonebook Editing of LDAP Search string Handset key Digits 0 g Jr em ABCabc2Aa DEFdef3 GHIghi4 JKLjkl5 MNOmno606 PQRSpars7 B TUVtuv8 WXYZwxyz9 i Olo INI AJIAJ AIT OIN ow E ug A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014
254. onfiguration of the selected server may be edited now After all changes to the server are initiated click on Apply to bring the changes into effect For details and impact of changes during running system services refer to Section 2 12 5 Dynamic Configuration Changes Button Import Server Config This button is needed to import a specific Server configuration file with further information for the specific server At present this feature is needed for servers of type LDAP For details refer to Section 5 14 5 LDAP information Button Show Server Config This functionality displays the current configuration of the selected Server type in a separate window if applicable Button Load Phonebook Using this option the system phonebook may be loaded by selecting an approp riate phonebook file csv by a file open dialog For details refer to Section 5 18 System Phonebook The column of the table have the following meaning Index Index number of the server automatically assigned by the WBM Enabled This option is necessary to enable or disable the current server Name A name for the server can be configured here This name serves mainly for identifying the server by its name IpAddr This option is necessary to configure the ip address of the current server Type This option is necessary to configure the Type of the current server At present the following types are supported NTP System
255. onized Base Stations The Base Station to be synchronized at must be an enabled Base Station at the IWU e air ext Non Default Synchronization of Base Stations over air i e directly via DECT but without additional Status information by the IWU This method occupies depending on the Beacon configuration one or more available timeslots which cannot be used for telephony but it allows the seamless handover between the radio areas of synchronized active Base Stations A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 145 Configuration reference Dect Configuration IWU The Base Station to be synchronized to must be a Base Station configured at the IWU but it need NOT be activated Alternatively a Base Station may also be synchronized to another Base Station that is NOT configured at the IWU e g Base Stations of other manuf acturers If the PARK of the external Base Station is known it may be entered as PARK Default of the Base Station to be synchronized on the page Ari For the external Base Station a Dummy module has to be configured Please notice that this may result in problems regarding the so called Beacon Announcement which may lead to frequent losses of synchroni zation To minimize this problem an internal Base Station may be used as synchro nization Base Station Therefore you have to configure 0 channels page DECT Device entry NumOfChannel No
256. onsidered After a factory downgrade of a BSIP IWU system take attention to which MAC address you are connecting to change the working mode of the BSIP BSIP Only to BSIPIWU If you simply connect to 192 168 1 1 you may be connected to ONE of all attached BSIPs This may not be the designated BSIP former BSIP IWU Therefore disconnect all other BSIP from the Ethernet or attach the designated BSIPIWU to a direct Ethernet connection at the Maintenance PC Login to this BSIP via WBM and change the application mode to IWU mode Afterwards you may connect the other BSIP Only to the Ethernet e Hint The MAC address is shown at page Administration Program Info Version System 6 5 Virtualization of MGW IWU 248 The MGW IWU may be running virtualized on a VMware vSphere environment on an ESXi Server The supported platform versions of the hypervisor ESXi server may be derived from the release notes of HCIP Important note Due to the real time processing and networking demands of the HPCIP system especially to the DECT communication with extremely bursty network streams using 10 msec packetizing as well as the high precise 1588 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration Techniques Installation of MGW IWU system communication towards the DECT basestations only the application mode MGW IWU is supported to run virtualized The other application modes Server IWU and MGW are
257. orms have two different systems partitions e System 1 and e System 2 Version System x Displays information about software version number and date and hardware MAC address part number revision of hardware e g X 7 Active system The radio buttons below Active System indicate which of the both System partition is the currently ACTIVE System partition In the example of the screenshot above System 2 is the active partition Hint Don t activate a system partition which displayed version is n a or update unsuccessfull This may lead to an unusable system A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 81 Configuration reference Administration IWU 4 3 2 1 System Update Updating the HPCIP system software Important notes If you update the system software the Update is always applied to the NON active system partition The current configuration of the active system will be applied to the NON active system partition You have to ensure to use the SAME software version at all BSIPs Therefore updating the software has to take place at the BSIP IWU AND at all BSIP Only A downgrade is not fully supported In need of a downgrade a factory reset is applied to the IWU as well as to all enabled BSIP Only automatically Please refer to the delivered Release notes of the new version for details of the update process Create a backup of the old configuration Page Reg
258. ort This field defines the IP port on which the configuration communication between the MGW IWU and all MGW is established The default value is 10601 In the lower part of the sub pages in the second group right to the spacer the following options are available Media Gateways 00 3 MGYY_Ulm bd A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 109 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Media Gateways General General Index 1 110 Enabled V Name MG Berlin 1 MGVY_Berlin_2 MGW Ulm Media Gateways This option is used to select a specific Media Gateway on those subpages which are specific to a Media Gateway 4 7 2 2 WBM gt Media Gateways gt General This page displays the table of all configured Media Gateways containing the General Media Gateway configuration MGVY Type MGW as QW Syslog Mac Addr Alive Timeout MGA 30 E no Syslog 00 0c 29 05 a5 1c 15 MG 30 E no Syslog 00 0c 29 a0 6c 43 15 MGW 30 E no Syslog 00 0c 29 32 f2 7c 15 The table contains the following columns Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name A unique name for the Media Gateway may be configured here e g Site Id the MGW is located and name of MG This name serves only for internal con
259. os value of the corresponding Media Gateway IWU network 4 7 2 9 WBM gt Media Gateways gt VoIP Gateway This page displays the mapping of Groups to VoIP gateways specific to a selected Media Gateway Depending on the selected Media Gateway which is chosen with the dropdown in the lower part of the page a list of all Groups which are assigned to the current Media Gateway will be displayed Hint This assignment is accomplished using the Media GW assignment to a specific group on page Group A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration This list of groups is created internally by the IWU by stepping through each entry of a group and checking if this group has an assignment to a specific Media Gateway which are determined by a number entry in field Media Gw If an assignment is detected the corresponding group will be displayed on this page Important note The assignment of PBX s to a specific Media Gateway is dependent of the Group the Media Gateway is assigned to Media Gateways VoIP Gateway VoIP Gateway Group l Group Name Voip Ne Gateways 2 OSV Headquarter 001 OSY Berlin HQ 3 OSV Branches 0 003 OSO Ulm Media Gateways 001 MGwv Berlin 1 ae The table contains the following columns Group Index Unique Index of Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Group Name
260. otFsl not active System2 Normalboot2 MSP Kernel2 CSP Kernel2 CSP RootFs2 6 V1 01 V0 34 0 21 1 V1 2 0 V0 34 0 21 1 V1 5 0 V0 34 0 16 0 V0 34 0 1 2 A v HardwareInfo cpu count Ea N cpu name armv6 compatible processor rev 1 v61 total memory 117948416 bytes A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 71 Configuration reference WBM overview IWU 72 Cancel By using the Cancel button the modifications which have been done since the last Apply are discarded Apply With this Button all WBM configuration is transfered to the Software and will be checked on validity using a validation process see output of Debug Window If only some WARNINGS are detected the configuration will be saved If ERRORS are detected the configuration is not saved Observe the ERROR messages in the debug window and apply the necessary changes to the configu ration and initiate a new Apply process A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference WBM overview IWU 4 1 5 Configuration Systematic Several Gateways PBXs are supported per HiPath Cordless IP system For establishing a call over a specific VoIP gateway these objects have to be mapped together This is done by means of assigning User Group MGW and PBX objects The new concept of V1R5 introduces a new entity of type Media Gateway MGW in the g
261. oups and Media Gateways by means of a Edit button Depending of the object which has to be changed the changes will influence the affected segment to other objects As an example if an ip address of a SIP PBX is changed this will influence the affected segment in this case all users which are assigned to the PBX by means of a group in a way that all user connections are disconnected and the affected users have to be reregistered at the new ip address The following rules if editing objects apply All changes at left part of MGW IWU gt MGW require a reboot of the object for changes to come in effect All changes at MGW IWU gt MGW gt Voip Gateway will disconnect active calls at the belonging Gateway Object Affected Segment Object Required Action MGW gt IWU Network ip settings reboot of MGW necessary MGW IWU gt MGW gt Reboot of all MGW necessary mainly due to Dect sync Dect Network issues all calls even cross linked calls are terminated MGW IWU gt MGW gt Not changeable at MGW IWU CC Network MGW IWU gt MGW gt Reboot of all MGW necessary therefore all CrossLinks are CC Network terminated current cross linked calls are terminated MGW IWU gt Network gt local ip settings connections to MGW Reboot of MGW IWU lower frame necessary if ip address and or ports change all MGW s have to be configured locally using the MGW WBM to re establish connectivity A31003
262. part of the new concept Only an exact match search is available The search parameters are not stored and therefore are lost after a logout of WBM or restart reboot of MGW IWU The search functionality is not intended to filter the user database instead it is implemented to search and afterwards locate to a specific entry Search functionality Using the Search functionality a specific user entry may be located inside the table by selecting the Search Scope Column the column in which the search should be applied to and the Search String which should be searched for If a search was successful the first matched entry is displayed at top of the table If a search was unsuccessfull a message box will inform about this condition If a user is locked by an Edit user lock switching between groups of rows using previous and Next is not supported A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 239 Feature Descriptions User Search Options V1R5 240 The search is based on an alphanumeric case insensitive search with an impli citly It works on a two step base e Initially all those entries are matched which contain at least the number of search digits The search scope is filtered to the digit list Afterwards the algorithm searches the first entry in the list which is equal or higher than the search filter Specific search criteria Search Matched No
263. portant note Please keep in mind that the implementer installer has to ensure that the FMID is geographically unique The FMID is built from the last digit of the ARI FPS Fixed Part Sub Number and the RPN of the base stations If the same FMID is used this may lead to spurious call losses and to instable system behavior if both radio parts of the DECT systems are running synchronous for a specific amount of time For details refer to Dect specification EN 300 175 2 and EN 300 175 6 Site Id All Media Gateways with the same Site Id are belonging to the same site To assign a MGW to a specific site the Site Id may be configured here once If the Site Id has to be changed for a specific MGW the MGW has to be deleted and newly created Site Sub ID This value is calculated by the WBM to identify a specific Media Gateway inside a site and to differ it from the other MGW s inside the same site The value is calculated by the WBM an cannot be changed Segments RPNS LAL Using this dropdown the number of Location Areas and their corresponding number of RPN Location area as well as the LAL may be configured The dropdown shows 8 possible selections A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Segments RPNs LAL 4 64 RPNs Loc Area LAL 33 8 32 RPNs Loc Area LAL 34 16 16 RPNs Loc Area LAL 35 32 8 RPNs L
264. r both HPCIP platforms HPCIP Small Solution and HPCIP Server Solution differ mainly in the initial configuration of the IWU Therefore only these steps are documented separately The Quick Start assumes the availabilty of two BSIP1 or one HPCIP Server and two BSIP1 e afunctional PoE network switch alternatively a switch and Power injectors and CAT 5 cables aMaintenance PC with administration account and e a supported PBX e g OpenScape Office as OSO MX The Quick Start further assumes that version V1R5 is already installed on all used components on the same system partition Otherwise update all compo nents to V1R5 first Corresponding information may be found in Section 4 3 2 1 System Update Please read the corresponding chapter in the detailed manual parts if you need further information regarding any step of the Quick Start The following conditions apply For the quick start it is assumed that no VLAN functionality is needed e No special DECT or PBX functionality is configured If applicable only default settings are used 3 1 1 Quick start overview 1 Prepare and connect hardware Configure BSIP1 Server for IWU mode Configuration of VoIP Infrastructure Network at IWU 2 3 4 Configuration of DECT Network at IWU 5 Configuration of users at the IWU 6 Configuration of users at the PBX A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 45 Quick St
265. r events Intercell handover during an active call are not considered by this counter 5 1 5 SNMP Trap Tree all IWU modes Root OID 2 The Root OID is assigned the OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 36378 All TRAPS bsipTraps are located inside the OID Root OID 2 n All SNMP TRAPS contain several data which are described here 5 1 5 1 trBsipOnlineState Root OID 2 1 Value Description Name trBsipOnlineState OID Root OID 2 1 Description This trap is triggered if a BSIP ONLY changed its state Online Offline Value Description trBsipMAC MAC address of the associated BSIP trBsipName Name of the associated BSIP trBsipEvent Possible events are ONLINE OFFLINE trBsipSeverity The assigned severity value is 1 5 1 5 2 TR BSIP SyncState Root OID 2 2 Value Description Name trBsipSyncState OID Root OlD 2 2 Description This trap is triggered if a BSIP ONLY changed its sync state InSync OutOfSync A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions SNMP Value Description trBsip MAC MAC address of the associated BSIP trBsipName Name of the associated BSIP trBsipEvent Possible events are InSync OutOfSync trBsipSeverity The assigned severity value is 2 5 1 5 3 TR_10_OVL100 Root OID 2 3 Va
266. r the IP VoIP Infrastructure Network Depending on the http access mode you have to use http or https mode HTTPS Enabled Juse http Server Ip of IP VoIP Infrastructure Network HTTPS Enabled X use https Server Ip of IP VoIP Infrastructure Network Example httos 192 168 100 1 3 1 7 Configuration of users at the PBX It is assumed that the VoIP users at the PBX are already configured For details refer to the corresponding chapter in the Service Manual 3 1 8 Configuration of users at the BSIP IWU 3 1 8 1 Gateway and Group 1 SIP General Access the WBM of the BSIP IWU WBM via the web browser at the mainte nance PC Example httos 192 168 100 1 Hint In https mode for the first login on a browser a https certificate has to be imported or accepted using browser specific mechanisms Log in to the WBM with Username Unify and password 1q21q2 Switch to configuration page Network Gateways General Add a new gateway entry by clicking on the button Add Gateway General Index Displayl Enabled Name Gateway Type ListenPortRem SIP Server Id Resolve Use OBP Outbound Proxy Netmask 1 1 v OpenScape Office MX 3bx oso 5060 192 168 100 125 v 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 0 5 Change the following values Name A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 56 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Change the preconfigured n
267. ration reference Users Configuration IWU 4 9 1 General user configuration 4 9 1 1 User Management Options Hint Adding editing and deleting of user entries is supported during running System services The buttons in the lower part of the page have the following functions Add User To add a new user entry even during running system services click on Add User A new entry with default values is appended The values have to be modified according to your system needs The new entry line is either inserted above the selected user or if no user entry is selected inserted at the end of the list If a group with name default is available and enabled a new user entry is automatically assigned to group default Delete User A selected user entry may be deleted by clicking Delete User even during running system services if the user has no active call established Hint The functionality Delete user does not remove the DECT registration of the handset It only removes the user entry from the WBM configuration Therefore if you delete an user entry by WBM the registration is already stored at the handset Therefore the handset may not be registered at the same ARI anymore To overcome this situation restore a configuration temporarily and remove the handset by using the Unregister button or register the handset at another Base Station with a different ARI Edit User To enable the configuration of User se
268. re terminated at the IWU process The Media Gateway breaks this media termination scheme IWU lt gt SIP and IWU lt gt BSIP by inserting the Media Gateway as a new entity between the IWU and SIP DECT Using a Media Gateway SIP connections are terminated at the Media Gateway entity and logical Dect communication is also terminated at the Media Gateway although DECT connections are terminated physically at the BSIP All BSIP at a specific Media Gateway have to be attached directly by a Layer2 network to the Media Gateway the same requirements are needed as described for a present V1R4 Dect network To assure consistent system architecture the Server IWU as well as the BSIP IWU will be enhanced by the concept of a logical local Media Gateway Media Gateway Local This concept is similar to the local BSIP included in a BSIP IWU Hint Support of BSIP as a hardware platform for MGW is not included in V1R5 2 2 2 1 Media Gateway Types Four different types of Media Gateways are available e Media Gateway 30 e Media Gateway 60 e Media Gateway 90 e Media Gateway 120 The type mainly determines the maximum number of concurrent calls 30 60 90 or 120 at the Media Gateway Furthermore the hardware type influences the number of needed resources at the Media Gateway IWU Therefore the hardware on which the different Media Gateway types are running is the same The different Media Gateways types 30 60 90 or 120 may be
269. res the L3 function of the relevant switch ports have to be deactivated since they increase the jitter values 5 3 1 VLAN Configuration Example The following figure depicts a sample setup of a system which uses Ethernet Synchronization acc IEEE1588 in combination with VLAN CoS and multiple switches Switch02 DECT 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 EEG w En E En E co if fl 1 l l l BSIP Only BSIP Only BSIP Only BSIP Only Switch01 Infrastru 12345 LILJEJCIL 10 VLAN Trunk d 42 9 m I I CENEENE ENECTH eae acts PBX A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 200 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Support for Different RTP Packet Sizes 5 4 Support for Different RTP Packet Sizes IP DECT supports RTP packet sizes of 10 20 and 30 msec for G 711 a law G 711 u law and G 729ab The detection of the RTP packet size is based on the received ptime value of the SIP SDP The default packet size is 20 msec for the sent ptime value sent by IP DECT in the SIP SDP for a specific Gateway Hints Restoring configuration files created with version before 3 34 11 will lead to gateway configurations with a default packet size of 20 msec For both platforms of IWU different G 729 Codecs are used BSIP IWU uses the Mindspeed G 729ab codec the Server IWU uses the ITU G 729ab codec 5 4 1 Implementation for Incoming Calls towards IP DECT If a ptime equal to
270. responding options have to be configured at the WBM of the corres ponding MGW directly Media Gateways IWU Network IWU Network Index 116 Enabled Name IpAddr Main Netmask Main VLAN Id Cos Value v MGN Berlin 1 192 168 100 81 255 255 255 0 1 0 v MG Berlin 2 192 168 100 82 255 255 255 0 1 0 v MGV Ulm 192 168 100 83 255 255 255 0 1 The table contains the following columns Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name A unique name for the Media Gateway may be configured here e g Site Id the MGW is located and name of MG This name serves only for internal configu ration purposes but doesn t uniquely identify a MGW IpAddr Main Displays the IP address of the Media Gateway IWU network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan Netmask Main Displays the IP address netmask of the Media Gateway IWU network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan VLAN Id The corresponding VLAN Id according IEEE 802 1q for the Media Gateway Voip network is displayed here COS Value Displays the Cos Value of the Media Gateway VoIP network of the Media Gateway as read with Scan A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 4 7 2 6 WBM gt Media
271. roup systematic A group is assigned to one or several Media Gateways In case of a BSIP IWU or Server IWU the groups can only be assigned to the MGW Local A MGW may be assigned one PBX on a per group base Therefore a MGW may be assigned several PBX by using several groups The following figure shows the relationships between Gateways Groups and Users of HPCIP V1R5 User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 User 5 User 6 User 7 User 8 User 9 Group 1 Group 2 Group 4 Y H Q4 ru MGW1 MGW1 MGW2 MGW1 MGW2 PBX 1 PBX 1 PBX2 PBX4 PBX5 According to the figure above the following relations exist e Several users may be assigned to one Group n 1 WBM gt User gt User gt Groups e Each group may be assigned to several MGW s 1 n WBM gt Group gt MediaGWList In case of a BSIP IWU or Server IWU the groups can only be assigned to the MGW Local Each MGW may be assigned to one PBX 1 1 inside a specific group WBM gt Media Gateways gt VoIP Gateway 4 1 6 Debug Windows To inform the user about special events e g configuration warnings and or errors a Debug window will display the corresponding messages to the user After changing and or applying changes to configuration objects the WBM displays the debug windows with warnings and or errors A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 H
272. rrent number of External Handover from the current MGW identified by Site SiteSubld to another MGW identified by value x inside the same site Following values are defined Numeric value Number of active External Hanover X External Handover not applicable since CCx SiteSubld of Current MGW Empty string No External HO applicable since no Cross Link configured Control Online last This field displays the date and time the Control connection towards the MGW IWU has been signaled Online last Control Offline last This field displays the date and time the Control connection towards the MGW IWU has been signaled Offline last Signal Online last This field displays the date and time the Signal connection towards the MGW IWU has been signaled Online last Signal Offline last This field displays the date and time the Signal connection towards the MGW IWU has been signaled Offline last Hints regarding Status Online Offline A MGW is treated Online if e System Services on MGW IWU are started and e MGW was successfully scanned and synced and A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 169 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Status MGW Mibs Index Disp 1 2 3 1 2 3 Name MG Berlin 1 MGwW Berlin 2 MGW Ulm Status MGW Mibs MGW Mibs Incoming calls ExtHO Cnt 1 ExtHO C ExtHO ExtHO ExtHO Roaming To Ro
273. rver addresses per gateway will be limited to 5 DNS 1 Using this option the primary used DNS Server for this Gateway may be confi gured This option determines if the System Dns servers are used See subpage Servers type SYSTEM DNS 1 or SYSTEM DNS 2 or gateway specific DNS servers See subpage Servers type ADD DNS are used DNS 2 Using this option the secondary used DNS Server for this Gateway may be confi gured This option determines if the System Dns servers are used See subpage Servers type SYSTEM DNS 1 or SYSTEM DNS 2 or gateway specific DNS servers see subpage Servers type ADD DNS are used 4 7 Media Gateways Configuration Due to the main differences between the application mode BSIP IWU Server IWU and MGW IWU these pages are documented separately 4 7 1 Media Gateways BSIP IWU and Server IWU Due to the enhancements in V1R5 for the new MGW concept a new object entity Media Gateway has been introduced To assure consistent system architecture the Server IWU as well as the BSIP IWU will be enhanced by the concept of a logical local Media Gateway Media Gateway Local This concept is similar to the local BSIP included in a BSIP IWU The Media Gateway Local implemented in BSIP IWU and Server IWU includes only a subset of the configuration options compared to the MGW IWU Media Gateways Dect Index Name ARI exc FPS PLI Segments RPNs LAL System Default Tpui 1 MgwLo
274. rvice menu select Phonebook If a system phonebook is configured for the user s group a further sub menu will appear Select LDAP Phonebook to open the LDAP phonebook If no system phonebook is configured the LDAP phonebook Search Mask is automatically opened If a system phonebook is configured select entry LDAP phonebook 5 14 6 1 Wildcard search To search for all entries leave the SearchMask empty and select the Softkey Ok This will start a LDAP query with a wildcard search mask which will retrieve a certain amount of LDAP entries Depending on the LDAP server using the wildcard search will retrieve the entries in the internal sort order of the LDAP server 5 14 6 2 Specific pattern search To search for a specific pattern enter the search pattern using the alphanumerical keypad A small cursor is displayed Input of digits Each selection of a digit using the keypad will start a timer of 1 second If the next digit is entered using the same keypad button as the last one before the timer 1 second expires the current cursor position will remain old behavior If the next digit is entered using another keypad button as the last one the cursor will automatically be moved to the next right position and the corresponding digit depending on the number of key presses will be entered at the current position new behavior If no digit is entered after the timer 1 second expires the cursor will automati cally
275. ry configuration to integrate the module in the running System are possible 5 20 2 Firmware Download to a single BSIP Fw Download If new modules with older firmware have been added it is possible to update them individually without the need of updating the whole IWU including all BSIP As a pre condition the BSIP has to be configured with a valid IP configuration Simply configure an Ip address and SYNC it if necessary using the Edit module functionality Afterwards select the module and press Fw Download The BSIP will automatically boot into the other partition with the new firmware If necessary to ensure the same partition between IWU and BSIP this process has to be repeated 5 20 3 Replacing module Replace module Two use cases may be handled using the process initiated with Replace module A defective or non existing BSIP may be replaced by a new BSIP e Exchange of 1588 Sync master in the system 5 20 3 1 Procedures for Replacing a BSIP Prerequisites The new BSIP new module has to have the same version as the MGW IWU be active on the same partition as the MGW IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 233 Feature Descriptions Dynamic BSIP Changes 234 be disabled Procedures Add the new module by attaching it to the network and make it available by scanning it using the SCAN button e To fulfill the prerequisites listed above use
276. s This comprises the MSN Username AuthName as well as the Password 2 5 DECT Roaming and Handover 30 The new system concept uses the similar mechanisms of Dect roaming and Dect handover Intracell and Intercell handover based on bearer handover as former V1R4 versions This concept has been enhanced by a freely configurable DECT LAL Location Area Level parameter Further information may be found in Section 5 28 Dect Fundamentals 2 5 1 Description of former Dect Roaming Concept Using DECT roaming in the old concept was realized by two different concepts 1 IWU triggered Dect Roaming To implement a branch office scenario IWU triggered Multi IWU roaming by means of DECT identification entities ARI was used Therefore several IWU s had to be configured using the same ARI The DECT user data had to be confi gured identically on all IWU s For this concept a geographical separation of DECT base stations between all sites is necessary due to the same ARI used on several unsynchronized DECT areas As one of the drawbacks SIP users had to be registered on each IWU at the specific IWU with an IWU specific Username To ensure reach ability PBX centric group mechanism e g MULAP groups had to be used to ensure reach ability at all locations and for the same phone number 2 Handset triggered Dect Roaming To implement a branch office scenario handset triggered Multi IWU roaming by means of different DECT registration
277. s handset will display No Roaming at this MGW HomeMediaGW Index only available for MGW IWU Using this dropdown box a Media Gateway has to be selected where the default SIP register is applied to The Dect register is also limited to the Home MGW LDAP Server only available for BSIP IWU Server IWU This option is needed to assign an LDAP server configured at page Network Gateway Servers to a group of users Therefore the users inside this group get access to the LDAP server phonebook For details refer to Section 5 14 5 LDAP information Phonebook Server only available for BSIP IWU Server IWU This option is needed to assign a Phonebook server configured at page Network Gateway Servers to a group of users Therefore the users inside this group get access to the Phonebook server phonebook Phonebook Prefix The Phonebook Prefix is prepended to the Dial String if the Telephone Number contains more digits than the InternCallLen For details refer to Section 5 18 System Phonebook InternCallLen With this setting the maximum number of digits of the calling Party number for internal calls is configured Calls with a larger number of digits are signalled as external calls at the handset The default value is 3 CF CallForward Enabled This option enables the functionality for newly introduced user specific Call Forward settings If this option is deselected the corresponding context menu in
278. s of the handset was used Therefore each IWU has to be configured using a different ARI The DECT user data may be configured differently on all IWU s A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes IP Roaming For this concept a geographical separation of DECT base stations between all sites is not necessary but suggested due to the missing synchronization between the Dect systems due to the different ARI 2 5 2 Description of new Dect Roaming Concept Since all data of a user is configured centralized at the Media Gateway IWU a separate site specific user configuration is not needed anymore The DECT roaming capability is mainly depending on the System ARI used Since the new concept introduces a branch concept roaming has to be confi gured more specific for the different sites To be able to implement a specific roaming scheme it is vital to understand the underlying DECT concepts 2 6 IP Roaming If an External DECT roaming event Roaming between different sites was detected for a user this will trigger an immediate SIP roaming event unregister from the former PBX and register at the current PBX for the MGW Therefore it is necessary that the global user configuration data is unique across the relating PBX of all sites This comprises the MSN the UserName the AuthName as well as the Password This doesn t apply for a MGW Handover event during an ac
279. s to the HPCIP system Enhance number of Basestations from currently 60 to approx 600 large setups Permit branch setups where a central IWU is located in the central office and the BSIP are located in several branch offices sites separated by Layer2 Ethernet or Layer links IP using LAN or WAN links Permit changes to the different configuration objects users groups network server PBX DECT Modules during running system services 2 1 Conceptual Overview MGW IWU mode 2 1 1 Graphical Overview of System Entities Media Gateway IWU Media Gateway IWU f MGW IWU IWU net Default Gateway VPN Se Default LJ Gateway MGW IWU network SA Default J Gateway Gateway 90 _MGw Dect net MGW VoIP net _Gw Dect net MGw VoIP net _ mew Dect net _MGW VoIP net _MGw Dect net _MGW VoIP net n 1 118 e nz1 118 e n 1 118 e n 1 118 PBX Sig RTP PBX Sig RTP PBX Sig RTP PBX Sig RTP Site1 Site1 Site2 Site3 Media Gateway1 Media Gateway2 Media Gateway1 Media Gateway1 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 25 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes System Entities 2 2 System Entities 26 2 1 2 Graphical Overview of Media Gateway Media Gateway Media Gateway MG1 MG2 BSIP 1 118 BSIP 1 118 Air Syne
280. side one location area location segment The assignment to a specific Location area is specified by the LAL and the RPN use for details see table below For example using LAL 35 RPN 1 15 are located inside the same Location area In case the handset changes its physical location from a base to another base inside the current Location area e g from base with RPN 1 to RPN 15 no LOCATION request is sent by the handset therefore no change of the LOCATION area is established In case the handset changes its physical location from a base to another base outside the current Location area e g from base with RPN 1 to RPN 20 a LOCATION request is sent by the handset therefore a change of the LOCATION area is established A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 241 Feature Descriptions Dect Fundamentals To ease the affiliation of a specific RPN to a specific roaming segment the WBM uses the concept of location segments which corresponds to a specific location area Using this concept it is not necessary anymore to determine which basestations belong to the same location segment by using a LAL RPN Location area lookup table Instead the affiliation is established by assigning the modules to a specific roaming area using a dropdown box The following table illustrates the correlation between LAL and the number RPN of BSIP located inside a location area
281. since should display actual local time values otherwise time will start at 01 01 1970 00 00 3 1 10 2 Register handsets Hint Alternatively it is possible to register several users at once using the Bulk Registration Mode Since this method is out of scope of a quick start the manual method is used here Switch to configuration page User Dect Prepare one handset for the registration process Attention Do not confirm the following procedure at the Handset right now Start the Registration procedure via the menu at the Handset Choose any Base Station for the Registration at the handset Enter the SystemPIN preconfigured to 00000000 at configuration page DECT as PIN at the handset Attention Do not confirm yet This configuration example uses the PIN 87654321 Select the corresponding user in the WBM to which the handset has to be assigned to User Dect Index Enabled Msn DisplayMame Comment HandsetType Ipui Park registered 1 v 761 761 Sales Sen 0000000000 2 v 762 762 Marketing Sen 0000000000 3 V 763 763 Support Sen 0000000000 Activate the Registration procedure at the WBM by clicking at Register at the bottom section of page User Dect A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution 5 Nowconfirm the already entered PIN at the Handset normally with softbutton OK The WBM displays the successful
282. sponsible f r logging the MGW IWU specific messages It is exclusively available for MGW IWU specific logging it may not be assigned to a MGW NTP System S NTP Server SNMP SNMP Server Hints for NTP configuration applies only to BSIP IWU Since the BSIP1 has no hardware clock the time has to be set by contacting a NTP or SNTP time server In contrast to the BSIP1 the Server has a built in hardware clock However the usage of an accurate time by using NTP is suggested Hint Some supported PBX platforms may serve as a S NTP server For details refer to the Service Manual A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 95 Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU 96 If a time server is not configured correctly and cannot be contacted local time will start at 01 01 1970 00 00 on a BSIP or with the local time on a Server IWU Hints for SNMP Server Using this option an IP address of a SNMP server may be configured here to which SNMP traps are being send For details refer to Section 5 1 SNMP Hints for DNS configuration System DNS 1 In this field the IP address of the first primary system global DNS server is confi gured If this server is unreachable the system uses System DNS 2 This address may also be based on DHCP if it is a component part of DHCP Offer For details refer to Section 5 7 2 DNS Administration S
283. stages of powering up a PoE link defined in 802 3af it may take up to some seconds until the power is delivered from the switch to the PoE port Take a look at the LEDs or the switch status LEDs to see at which point the power is available After this procedure the default configuration parameters will be set The default application mode after a reset is BSIP Only mode Hint The factory reset is applied to the currently active partition It does not affect the settings of the other partition But both operation mode settings BSIP Only and BSIP IWU of the active partitions are resetted Setting Value Operation mode BSIP Only IP address of VoIP network 192 168 1 1 Access mode http User Unify Username Unify password 192192 User UnifyAdmin Username UnifyAdmin password 1q21q2 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 23 Introduction Factory reset of BSIP1 24 Seiting Value Operation mode BSIP IWU IP address of VoIP network 192 168 2 1 Access mode http User Unify Username Unify password 1q21q2 User UnifyAdmin Username UnifyAdmin password 1g21g2 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Conceptual Overview MGW IWU mode 2 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes The new version V1R5 introduces some new concepts and feature
284. t Entry of LDAP Server gt User and Password After changing the credentials a reboot of the HPCIP system is necessary LDAP Config File Example LdapConfigGlobal it LdapServerName Contains a descriptive name for the LDAP server LdapServerName LDAPServerOSO LdapSearchRootDN Contains the DN for the root of the search LdapSearchRootDN dc web MaxSearchResultNum Determines the maximum number of records which should be retrieved by the LDAP server MaxSearchResultNum 20 PhoneNumberAttrName Determines the field name the phone number should be retrieved from PhoneNumberAttrName telephoneNumber LdapConfigSearch it Description Informative description for this section Description SearchDescription it Attribute Determines the field name for the LDAP search Attribute sn LdapConfigDisplay it MaxLen Determines the max length of string which should be retrieved The allowed len for all DisplayDescription fields is 16 In case several fields are used the allowed len may exceed 16 chars In each case the string is truncated at the handsets to 15 chars MaxLen 7 Description Determines the first field of the search result Description DisplayDescription1 Attribute Determines the field name where data should be retrieved from Attribute sn The following section is optional It is only neededd if First Name and Last Name have to be derived from different LDAP fields LdapConfigD
285. t Matched Description String 0 all none 0 selects the first user gt 0 00 10 1 2 3 9 00 selects the first user entry gt 0 but with at least two leftmost digits e g 10 11 100 20 20 1 2 3 19 all 000 selects the first user entry gt 0 but with at 1 digit entries least three leftmost digits e g 100 101 900 are not displayed The objects in the frame have the following meaning Search Scope Column This Dropdown contains all fields columns which may be used as the search scope The search scope is limited to this column Search String This textbox contains the string which should be searched Only a full text match is supported Search The search is started using this button Max Lines Determines how much lines should be displayed on one page at maximum Hint This limit also applies for both types of tables the standard table displaying rows not limited to a search and the search result table Step Size Determines the offset of lines which should be displayed after a Previous or Next table display is established If set equal to Max Lines the next or previous table will only include other user entries If set to a values less than Max Lines some user entries of the old table are repeated Max Lines Step Size and new entries are displayed Step Size Previous Displays the next group of rows with an offset of Step Size A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014
286. t in support for Conferencing The conferencing feature requires a constant voice data stream from the participants If one of the participants is using G 729 with activated Silence Compression G729ab a constant voice data stream is not assured This will lead to distorted conferences if one or several of the participants are using G729 with Silence suppression G729ab To overcome this situation it is suggested to Disable the silence compression feature at the local users by Disabling the Option at the users configuration WBM User VoIP Table SC Silence Compression see next chapter 5 5 1 General G 729 hints The codec implementation which is used for the HPCIP system uses G 729ab mode including silence suppression Please keep in mind that G 729 ab requires less bandwidth between the IWU and the PBX As a drawback the voice quality of G 729ab connection is not as good as compared to G 711 connections Using G 729ab for voice connections requires more system resources at the IWU Therefore the maximum number of parallel connections for the IWU of HPCIP BSIP IWU will lower the maximum number of calls from 10 to a specific value depending on the number of G729 and parallel G711 calls For details refer to chapter 5 5 2 Call Control for G 729 Call Limiting BSIP IWU only In contrast to the BSIP IWU which has very limited CPU performance compared with the Server IWU on a Server IWU all 50 calls may be established
287. t of Network State on page Administration contains important infor mation about SIP Survivabilty Example output Network configurations of HPCIP Server iHHt ApplicMode Iwu Network Gateway settings Ip Address 192 168 100 112 Network Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 100 101 DHCP enabled FALSE Dns Server 1 192 168 100 226 Dns Server 2 192 168 100 227 Gateway tHt 001 lt OSOMX3bx gt Ip 1 192 168 100 230 5060 002 OSOMX1bx gt Ip 1 lt 192 168 100 226 gt 5060 003 OSV5 gt Ip 1 192 168 100 204 5060 004 DNS SRV GW Ip 1 192 168 100 111 5060 PenaltyBox yes 004 DNS SRV GW gt Ip 2 lt 192 168 100 112 gt 506 PenaltyBox no 004 lt DNS SRV GW Ip 3 lt 192 168 100 113 gt 506 PenaltyBox no A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 210 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Message Waiting Indication MWI 5 8 Message Waiting Indication MWI Besides the existing functionality of the MWI LED MWI will be signaled for missed calls the feature will be enhanced to additionally support voicemail and to signal the presence of new Voicemails To activate this new feature two new configuration options are available Group gt GroupOfHandset gt VM VoiceMail Enabled If this option is enabled the corresponding menu for VoiceMail of all handset inside the current group HandsetUI gt Call Lists gt Voic
288. table contains the following columns Index This field contains a unique Index of the Media Gateway entry This value is automatically incremented by the WBM Enabled When activating this element the selected Media Gateway entry is enabled at the MGW IWU Name A unique name for the Media Gateway may be configured here e g Site Id the MGW is located and name of MG This name serves only for internal configu ration purposes but doesn t uniquely identify a MGW ARI excl FPS In the field ARI excl FPS and FPS the System ARI DECT ID which has to be unique at each DECT system has to be configured The SystemAri is provided by the system implementer Supported System Ari classes are Class B Ari A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 111 Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration 112 Hint All handset registrations are bound to a specific System ARI If the System ARI is changed all handsets loose their registration at the IWU To achieve system functionality the handsets have to be registered again at the IWU This field contains the Dect ARI excluding the FPS part ARC EIC FPN FPS This field contains the Dect Fixed Part Sub number which is a 4 bit 1 digit value containing values from 1 to F Hint The ARI is built of the combined values of ARC EIC FPN FPS Example The ARI 101b2fe1 is segmented into ARC 1 EIC 01b2 FPN fe FPS 1 Im
289. ted due to design limits If one MGW inside a site is busy with 120 call streams each no handover to this MGW will be possible as well as no new calls either incoming or outgoing are possible If a site is using several MGW s the corresponding DECT networks MUST NOT be located in the same LAN segment They have to be separated by different LAN segments or by means of VLAN separation Reasons for this segmentation are e Several 1588 master which broadcast 1588 information gt high broadcast rate may overflow switches and may be treated as broadcast storms e Ease of recognition of 1588 master if only one 1588 master in one LAN segment e Same ip addresses in the DECT network are possible 2 8 Feature Concepts 32 2 8 1 LDAP and LDAP Phonebook In the traditional IWU V1R4 it was possible to configure several LDAP servers on a per group base The integrated LDAP client of the IWU was terminated at the IWU In the new concept also several LDAP Servers are possible The LDAP Client is located at the MGW IWU A LDAP Server may be assigned to a specific Media Gateway on a group base A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Specified System Limits 2 8 2 System Phonebook In the traditional IWU V1R4 only one phonebook IWU was possible In the new concept several phonebooks on a group base are possible limited to MGW IWU 2 9 Specified
290. ter Media Gateway Synchronization at a MGW A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 41 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Details to System Entities 42 2 12 3 Requirements 2 12 4 Network Communication Concept 2 12 4 1 General Requirement VPN The concept of V1R5 branch offices is based on transparent ip networking and routing Since most branch offices are expected to be connected by standard ADSL or DSL lines with a public ip which mostly is NAT ted access to the network behind has to be established using special methods which may differ from branch to branch To ensure transparent ip networking between the Media Gateway IWU and Media Gateways IP tunneling based on Layer 3 IP is a requirement Most popular IP tunneling implementations are based on VPN Virtual Private Networks imple mented with ipsec or OpenVPN Since similar concepts for connecting branch offices to OSV by VPN already exist using VPN should be a well known concept Please keep in mind that the design and implementation of the VPN networks is outside the scope of this documentation 2 12 4 2 Communication Concept 1 bidirectional UDP connection between MGW and MGW IWU for initial control tasks 1 bidirectional TCP connection between MGW and MGW IWU for control tasks 1 bidirectional TCP connection between MGW and MGW IWU for signaling tasks Hint The initial communication between MGW and MGW IWU to S
291. than 70 of the available channels For a standard configuration of a BSIP with 10 calls see configuration option NumOfChannel at Section 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base per BSIP the counter is triggered if 7 calls are active on the DECT side Ovl 100 This counter displays how often the BSIP has allocated 100 96 of the available channels For a standard configuration of a BSIP with 10 calls per BSIP see configuration option NumOfChannel at Section 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base the counter is triggered if 10 calls are active on the DECT side A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 177 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Status Base 1588 4 12 4 4 Page Base 1588 178 Bsip 1 001 YES Bslp1 002 YES Name Online Sync N A YES State 1 0 5 Drift initial Drift cor Delay min Jitter av Time diff Delay r Delay m Delay m Delay r Limir Limt2 r Limit3 r 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 665 163 19220 46 20 1 1 0 3 0 0 0 The following counters are only displayed for BSIP s which are configured as 1588 Sync slaves Hint These counters are solely provided for analysis of possible Ethernet synchronization acc IEEE1588 issues and therefore are not described in detail The columns of the table have the following meaning Index This field contains the absolute resp global index number of the DECT m
292. the appropriate chapter for the belonging PBX in the Service Manual User User We Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment Language Groups lv 752 762 Marketing Deutsch 001 default iv 763 763 Support Deutsch 001 default iv 761 761 Sales Deutsch 001 default 3 Change the contents of the following fields Msn necessary The MSN has to correlate with the Call number of the User at the PBX This configuration example uses MSN 761 762 and 763 DisplayName necessary This information is shown at the idle display of the corresponding handset This configuration example uses MSN 761 762 and 763 Comment optional Here you may enter any desired text for administration purposes oc This configuration example uses the values Sales Marketing and Support Language The language used for display messages of the handset can be selected here This configuration example uses the language Deutsch A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Groups Choose a Group and with that a Gateway from the dropdown box to which the user is associated to This configuration example uses the default Group name default 4 Switch to configuration page User sub page Voip User gt Voip User Voip Voip Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment UserName AuthName Password G729 SC Sile 2 v 762 762 Marketing 762 762
293. the Handset UI is not available A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 125 Configuration reference Group Configuration IWU Group For details refer to Section 5 12 Call Forward CF CW CallWaiting Enabled This option enables the functionality for newly introduced user specific CallWaiting settings If this option is deselected the corresponding context menu in the Handset UI is not available For details refer to Section 5 17 Call Waiting CW CW YM YoiceMail Ena Vl v Vl 126 vj v Vl VM Number Voice CC CallCompletion Ena CCBS MSN Busy Call CCNRy Msn NoReply CC Delete amp ll Msn C CPU Call Pickup Gr CPU Msn Call Pick 85382 v 30 30 31 85382 vj 30 30 30 Iv 122 7 VM VoiceMail Enabled This option enables the functionality for newly introduced user specific VoiceMail settings If this option is deselected the corresponding context menu in the Handset UI is not available For details refer to Section 5 8 Message Waiting Indication MWI VM Number VoiceMail This option is needed to configure the number of the VoiceMail system which has to be dialed by the IWU if the call should be forwarded to the VM For details refer to Section 5 8 Message Waiting Indication MWI CC CallCompletion Enabled This option enables the functionality for newly introduced user specific CallCom pletion
294. the IWU 5 1 2 SNMP Application mode differences The Server IWU und BSIP IWU deliver basestations specific MIBs and traps The MGW IWU delivers additionally besides the basestation specific infor mation MGW specific MIBs and traps Therefore two different MIB files are available In contrast to the MIB File of Server IWU and MGW IWU besides the enhance ments of MGW specific values one additional Value bsipStatistics MgwIndex 2 is available in the MGW IWU A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 187 Feature Descriptions SNMP 5 1 3 SNMP Tree View all IWU modes hpcipMib 36378 bsipMibs 1 b rera R String bsipStatistics Version 1 bsipStatistics 01 2 bsEntry 1 1 Index bsIndex 1 R Integer32 bsIndex 1 1 Range 0 32000 R String bsFrom 01 2 R String bsTo 01 3 R String bsRPN 01 4 R String bsMAC 01 5 R String bsName 01 6 R String bsOVL70 01 7 R String bsOVL100 01 8 R String bsRoaming 01 9 t bsipStatistics 02 3 bsEntry 2 1 Index bsIndex 2 R Integer32 bsIndex 02 1 Range 0 32000 R String bsFrom 02 2 R String bsTo 02 3 R String bsRPN 02 4 R String bsMAC 02 5 R String bsName 02 6 R String bsOVL70 02 7 R String bsOVL100 02 8 R String bsRoaming 02 9 Hint Output of bsipStat
295. the IWU sends and expects untagged Ethernet packets Therefore the switch port to which the IWU is connected to has to be configured to untag the Ethernet frames from the VLAN lds In case of BSIP IWU or Server IWU VLAN IDs unequal to 0 have to be confi gured for the VLAN Id of the VoIP Infrastructure network this VLAN Id AND for the VLAN Id of the DECT network Important note In contrast to an IWU BSIP IWU Server IWU or MGW IWU the BSIP Only is not able to handle tagged Ethernet packets For this reason the Switchport at which a BSIP Only is attached to has to be configured untagged A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU In case of BSIP IWU or Server IWU all Ethernet frames towards the VoIP Infra structure network between the IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN ld if unequal 0 configured for the Infrastructure network option VLAN Id at page Network this option All Ethernet frames towards the DECT network between the IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN Id configured for the DECT network option VLAN Id at page DECT In case of MGW IWU all Ethernet frames towards the Media Gateway IWU network between the MGW IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN Id configured for the Media Gateway IWU network option VLAN Id at page Network th
296. the Media Gateway and all BSIP Only inside the MGW is established The default value is 10500 VPN enable This option enables the encryption of data communication signaling and voice data between the Media Gateway and all BSIP Only Encryption is realized by using an IPsec connection in transport mode using static keys A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Media Gateways Configuration Hint Some system relevant functions e g SCAN and SYNC are transmitted unencrypted VLAN Id The corresponding VLAN Id according IEEE 802 1q for the DECT network is configured here Important note Regardless of the value configured here the BSIP Only is not able to handle tagged Ethernet packets This is due to the fact that a BSIP Only has no local console access as compared to a standard cable based SIP phone and therefore may not be accessible anymore if VLAN is not configured correctly For this reason the Switchport at which a BSIP Only is attached to has to be configured untagged and assigned the VLAN Id configured here This does not apply to a BSIP IWU or a Server IWU The BSIP IWU and Server IWU are able to handle tagged Ethernet packets All Ethernet frames towards the VoIP Infrastructure network between the IWU and the Ethernet switch are tagged with the configured VLAN Id configured for the Infrastructure network option VLAN Id at page Network G
297. the built in functions Fw Download and Sync for the new module to prepare this BSIP for further treatment e Select the entry of the module which should be replaced old module and press Replace module Now enter the Index number the new module which was newly added e The values of the new entry will be replaced with the values of the old module PARK MAC Serial Ip address The old entry which was designated for the old module will be deleted in the list of modules Important note After the process of replace module has finished the new module will have the same ip address as the old module If the old module is already attached to the network it has to be detached immediately to avoid the same ip address which definitively will lead to temporarily or constant malfunction of the system especially if the module was configured as 1588 master 5 20 3 2 Procedures for Exchanging the 1588 Sync Master If a BSIP configured as Sync type 1588 master fails all other BSIP configured as 1588 Slave will get Out of Sync Therefore another BSIP configured as 1588 slave may be reconfigured as 1588 slave This process will require a stop of the System services To overcome the situation of stopping the system services the reconfiguration of a 1588 slave to the new 1588 master may be accomplished using the replace module process Prerequisites Keep in mind that the maximum number of switch hops 3 between the 1588 master and
298. the used Carrier for the voice channel One cell in a Rx line displays the receive level of the Base Station in relation to the active call value Shows the current value receive resp send signal of the Rx resp Tx timeslot depending on the configuration of RSSI Db and Limit A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 181 Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU 182 Value ranges minimal value corresponds to poor signal strength 85 dB resp 9 RSSI maximum value corresponds to good signal strength 50 dB resp 31 RSSI Values outside a bbb sss or line display the signal level receive level of other DECT devices The number of values as well as their value itself shall be as small as possible The options at the lower part of the configuration page have the following meanings RSSI The values displayed in the RSSI table are RSSI values Db The values displayed in the RSSI table are Db values This is the default setting Limit Here you can configure a minimum value Only values greater in the case of Db only values smaller than Limit are displayed in the RSSI table Normally the following default values are used RSSI 9 Db 85 Module Here you may select the Base Station which values are displayed at the table A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration refere
299. ther base station No if the selected Base Station is OutOfSync unsynchronized which means that this base station has NOT been synchronized to another base station At the base Station which is not synchronized to another base an exclusively Sync Master or no sync configured the value is n a Calls This filed displays the number of DECT calls which are currently active at the specific module MoSync This field displays the number of the Dect module to which the current module is synced to its air sync master For synchronization via Ethernet this field is empty TsSync This field displays the Timeslot on which the current module is synced to its air sync master For synchronization via Ethernet this field is empty CaSync This field displays the Carrier on which the current module is synced to its air sync master For synchronization via Ethernet this field is empty A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Status Configuration IWU Ts1TxBc This field displays the Timeslot on which the current module emits its first main beacon signal Ca1TxBc This field displays the Carrier on which the current module emits its first main beacon signal Ts2TxBc This field displays the Timeslot on which the current module emits its second secondary beacon signal Ca2TxBc This field displays the Carrier on which the current module emits its s
300. tion Introduction Terminology 1 1 2 Different Wording Conventions There are two different wording schemes which describe the components or functionalities of the HiPath Cordless Ip System eA new wording scheme mainly targeted on marketing issues and An old wording scheme focuses on technical issues and current WBM wording This documentation uses the old wording scheme since most WBM elements are already implemented using the old scheme The following table depicts the mapping between the new and the old scheme New wording scheme marketing Old wording scheme technical Small Solution Small Solution Server Solution Server Solution Large Solution HPCIP Media Gateway IWU Solution HCIP Server mode Management Server mode Media Server mode Server IWU HCIP Management Server mode MGW IWU Server running in Media Gateway IWU mode HCIP Media Server mode MGW Server running in Media Gateway mode BSIP only mode BSIP only mode BSIP IWU mode BSIP IWU mode Unless otherwise noted the instructions in this document refer to all three solutions 1 2 Terminology The terms Voip gateway and PBX are used as a synonym for the supported communication servers OpenScape Office MX OSO MX HiPath 3000 HiPath 4000 and OpenScape Voice OSV The term BSIP Only is used as a synonym for a BSIP1 which is not running the HiPath Cordless I
301. tive call the call remains connected on the MGW it was established until it will be disconnected After the disconnect has finished the SIP user will be roamed onto the new MGW 2 7 Network Concept Media Gateway For a traditional HPCIP system three different networks have been assigned 1 VoIP Infrastructure network 2 DECT network 3 BSIP1 internal networks onboard network communication between the processors of the BSIP For the new concept of Media Gateway the former VoIP infrastructure network is separated into three different networks The DECT network as well as the BSIP1 internal network concept don t change A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 31 V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Feature Concepts 1 Media Gateway IWU network new 2 Media Gateway VoIP network new 3 Media Gateway CrossLink network new 4 Media Gateway DECT network 5 BSIP1 internal networks One ip address and a default gateway for the Media Gateway IWU network may be configured Therefore all other routing towards the Media Gateway IWU has to be handled by the default gateway of the Media Gateway IWU network Keep in mind that for MGW of type 120 inside a site up to 120 connections may handover between two MGW s Therefore the Router connection between these MGW s has to be designed to handle this bandwidth Per MGW independent of type of MGW max 120 call streams are suppor
302. to enable roaming within a site or between different sites these sites have to be configured to the same ARI EIC and FPN Each Media Gateway inside a site has to obtain the same ARI otherwise massive DECT related distortion Call setup and handover are possible Each Media Gateway between different sites has to obtain the same ARI if roaming is needed between this sites This concept utilizes the usage of ARI efficiently because one single ARI may be re used for several MGWs at different sites As a drawback all handsets may be able to roam into all sites To overcome this situation the roaming authorization may be configured separately for each group Important Rule Roaming is supported inside those Bases which are covered by the same ARI A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 244 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration Techniques Free IP Addressing 6 Configuration Techniques 6 1 Free IP Addressing Starting with V1R2 the possibility of free IP addressing and therefore full functio nality of the Default Gateway support is supported Free ip addressing In V1R1 the DECT network was statically configured to 192 168 0 0 16 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 Starting with V1R2 the DECT network is now freely configurable by means of configuring DECT ip address and the corresponding netmask The following restrictions apply Infrastructure network and the DECT network have to be different they also may not o
303. ttings during running system services there is a special functionality Edit user available To modify an existing user entry select a user row and click on Edit user to change the values Selection of user entry prior to Edit User User User Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment Language Groups 1 v 00101 101 Sales 1 Deutsch 003 OS Y Branches 2 v 00102 102 Sales 2 Deutsch 003 OS V Branches 3 Iv 00103 103 Sales 3 Deutsch 003 OS v Branches A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 129 Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU Selection of user entry after Edit User User User User Index Enabled Msn DisplayName Comment Language Groups 1 v 00101 101 Sales 1 Deutsch 003 OS V Branches po102 3 v 00103 103 Sales 3 Deutsch 003 OSV Branches The user is locked until you press Apply to submit or press Cancel to discard the changes Register The DECT registration process for a selected User is started by clicking on button Register The registration mode will be activated for a certain period of time At the handset of the User the registration has to be started and the PIN number as configured in chapter 4 10 5 Configuration Page Dect ARI has to be entered when requested Notes The handset may be registered exclusively at the users Home MGW due to security and performance issues Registering the handset at another MGW will not
304. ture Descriptions Call Completion CC 5 13 Call Completion CC 220 5 13 1 Feature description The CCBS CCNR Call Completion to Busy Subscriber Call Completion on No Reply feature provides subscribers the capability to activate an automatic callback if the called endpoint is busy or is not answering an alerting call 5 13 2 WBM configuration The configuration of CC is accomplished on a group specific base at the WBM The CallCompletion feature may be used for busy calls and for calls with no reply The activation of the feature is accomplished by dialing feature access codes from the calling user s handset To automate the task of dialing the correct code via the handset UI the codes have to be configured at the WBM WBM gt Group gt CC CallCompletion Enabled WBM gt Group gt CCBS MSN Busy CallCompletion WBM gt Group gt CCNRy MSN NoReply CallCompletion WBM gt Group gt CC DeleteAllMsn CallCompletion If option CC CallCompletion Enabled is activated the feature CC is generally activated and the corresponding service menu for CallCompletion of all handset inside the current group as well as additional information after a call setup will be displayed The codes for Busy NoReply and DeleteAll CallCompletion are a PBX specific configuration options Hint The call flow after the callback call from the PBX is similar to the call of a 3PCC call When the callback is initiated by the PBX this c
305. ty Using the Search functionality a specific user entry may be located inside the table by selecting the Search Scope Column the column in which the search should be applied to and the Search String which should be searched for If a search was successful the first matched entry is displayed at top of the table If a search was unsuccessfull a message box will inform about this condition If a user is locked by an Edit user lock switching between group of rows using previous and Next is not supported Search Scope Column MSN v Search String 0 Search Max Lines 50 Step Size 50 Previous Next The objects in the frame have the following meaning Search Scope Column This Dropdown contains all fields columns which may be used as the search scope The search scope is limited to this column Search String This textbox contains the string which should be searched Only a full text match is supported Search The search is started using this button A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 132 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Users Configuration IWU Max Lines Determines how much lines should be displayed on one page at maximum Hint This limit also applies for both types of tables the standard table displaying rows not limited to a search and the search result table Step Size Determines the offset of lines which should be displayed after a Previous or Next table displ
306. ty is also signaled when this user already has an active connection given that CW is configured for the A user This enables the A user to use the CTI software to dial another user which may then be connected into a conference call or may be transferred A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 217 Feature Descriptions Call Forward CF 5 12 Call Forward CF 218 Besides the possibility to configure a PBX based call forward the handset user is given the possibility to activate deactivate a local call forwarding for the following four cases e Call Forward Unconditional CFU e Call Forward Busy CFB e Call Forward No Reply CFNRy user doesn t respond after a specific amount of time and e Call Forward Not Reachable CFNRc handset could not be reached by air e g out of dect area battery empty switched off All four types further distinguish between internal and external calls i e different forwarding destinations Therefore a combination of up to 8 different call forwards may are possible The default settings are e CFU default inactive default CF number Voicemail number of group see Group VM Number e CFB default inactive default CF number Voicemail number of group see Group VM Number e CFNRy default inactive default CF number Voicemail number of group see Group gt VM Number default timer 25 seconds e CFNRe default inactive def
307. u n i F E AOU enterprise HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 u n F g your enterprise Our Quality and Environmental Management Systems are implemented according to the requirements of the ISO9001 and ISO14001 standards and are certified by an external certification company Copyright Unify GmbH amp Co KG 05 2014 Hofmannstr 51 81379 Munich Germany All rights reserved Reference No A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 The information provided in this document contains merely general descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice Unify OpenScape OpenStage and HiPath are registered trademarks of Unify GmbH amp Co KG All other company brand product and service names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders unify com Contents Contents T1 ntrod ction oem oe oe eet ee eg eM a ee et haat sese ce AA a e Mia ee aie Eee 10 1 19 CODO i oque beef eirt x a rette De potu emitte deed cb due ae i De Eo ba deme dlls ah shalt 2 10 1 1 1 HPCIP Solution Overview lssessesseee hrs 10 1 1 2 Different Wording Conventions
308. ual External Sync Basestations as well as a number of CrossLinks which will decrement the number of physical BSIP For detail refer to Section 2 12 2 3 Max no of BSIP per MGW 2 10 1 Resource Counter Resource Counter At the Media Gateway IWU limited resources for the number of concurrent calls are available The number of concurrent calls is deter mined by the Media Gateway Type 30 60 90 or 120 For a Media GW 30 30 concurrent calls are available The no of resource counter needed is 2 For a MediaGW 120 120 concurrent calls are available The no of resource counter needed is 8 The maximum number of Resource Counters MediaGW IWU is limited to 200 Therefore the maximum number of MGW s MGW IWU is variable and is limited to 200 by the following formula No of MGW 30 2 No of MGW 60 4 No of MGW 90 6 No of MGW 120 8 200 2 10 2 Stream Stream At the Media Gateway limited resources for the number of media streams are available A stream may be treated as a local connection at a Media Gateway between a SIP RTP and DECT call leg For a standard call at a MGW where the DECT call leg is terminated at a BSIP attached to the same MGW and the SIP call leg is terminated at a PBX terminated at the same MGW one stream is allocated see figure below A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation V1R5 Enhancements and Changes Definitions M
309. uf Diskette Festplatte speichern C F r Dateien dieses Typs immer diese Aktion ausf hren 2 You have to select the store method of the dialog click on button OK and select from the following save as dialog a folder to store the configuration files on the maintenance PC or a directory available via the network Bitte geben Sie den Dateinamen an unter dem die Datei gespeichert werden s Jf Speicher in Configurations d iwu_config taz Zuletzt verwendete D Desktop A Eigene Dateien Arbeitsplatz m amp Dateiname jwu config taz Netzwerkumgeb Dateityp WinZip Datei Abbrechen 3 Save the configuration file using the default name iwu config tgz or change 80 it according to your needs Don t use blanks in the filename A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Administration IWU 4 3 2 Frame Program Info Version System 1 and Version System 2 Program Info Active System Version System 1 System Update Reboot Board Version System 2 Shutdown Board Applic Mode IWU Applic Mode MGW Factory Setting Network State System1 and System2 partitions To guarantee a functional BSIP1 or IWU at any time two bootable systems are present on the BSIP The current active system and e the fallback non active system Therefore the BSIP1 and the server based platf
310. update all values Index Mod 2 5 5 Y 009 001 002 003 Enabled Name CL 1 2 Bslp 2 001 Bslp 2 002 CL 1 2 Bslp 1 0 Type Basestati Version HwRev Partlnfo1 Partinfo2 IpAddr Module Ip amp ddr Server Serve Mac Addr CrossLin 000000000 0 n a n a 192 168 100 81 192 168 100 582 0 fe 02 c0 a8 54 51 Bslp 759239403 V4013pr1020 8 v40 40 V4013 Act 192 168 2221 192 168 222 254 10500 00 1 a e8 21 c4 f2 Bslp 759238960 V4 013 Apr1020 8 V40410 Y4 0 13 Act 192 168 2222 192 168 222 254 10500 00 1 4 e8 21 c5 2e Virt Base 000000000 Y4013Apr1020 0 n a n a 192 168 100 81 192 168 100 852 0 ff 00 c0 a8 64 51 The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning only display Note The columns Index Module Number MGW Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages A description of these can be found in chapter 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base Type This field displays the type of the Base Station BsipLocal for a BSIP IWU or Bslp for a BSIP Only BasestationSerialNr This field displays the serial number of the Base Station as read with Scan Version This field displays the version number and the version date of the current firmware running on the active partition of the BSIP as read with Scan Furthermore if the Hardware version is not compatible e g if BSIP from other Ip DECT OEM systems are used it additionally displays hardware not compa
311. upport staff Note Please note that depending on the activated Logging configuration big amounts of data may be produced which may have negative influence on the performance of the IWU Software and the System Therefore you should only activate Logging functions when requested by a support engineer The columns of the configuration page have the following meaning Note The columns Index Module Number MGW Enabled and Name are repeated on all sub pages A description of these can be found in chapter 4 10 2 Configuration Page Dect Base Debug Disable Default value Deactivated When activating this entry the Logging functionality for the active DECT module is disabled independent of the configured Debug level Debug Lvl Default value 0x00000000 Debug level of the selected entry The value may be entered directly as a hexadecimal value A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 153 Configuration reference Debugging Configuration IWU 4 11 Debugging Configuration IWU This page is only displayed with Unify Admin mode at the WBM HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G UNIFY Debugging Debugging Server 154 Server Disable al v v Logfile a Syslog Name Capi2032
312. uring running services is not possible without special handling of these objects at the IWU Therefore you have to e Stop the system services Offline mode to edit these values or Edit the object using a specific functionality Edit object You may add delete or modify existing object entries To modify existing entries select a user row and click the corresponding Edit xxx Now the entries in the table row are editable Changes for the selected objects are locked until the changes are applied using the Apply button or are reverted using the CANCEL button Hints regarding deletion of users Please keep in mind if deleting a user entry the DECT registration is NOT being removed Therefore the handset may not be reregistered on the same ARI again If a user should be deleted during an active call the object will NOT be deleted A message box will inform about this In HPCIP V1R5 a lot of new objects may be modified during running system services For details refer to Section 2 12 5 Dynamic Configuration Changes A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 21 Introduction Partition concept of BSIP1 1 7 Partition concept of BSIP1 22 To guarantee a functional BSIP at any time two bootable systems are imple mented at the BSIP1 Acurrent system and the fallback system Therefore the BSIP has two different systems partitions System 1 and System 2 Both system partitions
313. using G 729 The codec may be activated on a per user base see column G729 at page User Voip even during running system services using the Edit User button The usage of G 729 codec is mainly intended for low bandwidth connections WAN In contrast G 711 connections are mainly preferred inside the LAN where bandwidth should not be an issue Depending on the gateway used internals calls between two enabled G729 users are also established with G 729 To overcome this situation the PBX has to control the codec negotiation between different users The only capable gateway with codec negotiation between SIP subscribers is OpenScapeVoice using the CAC Codec Manipulation feature A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Feature Descriptions Codec G729 Activating codec G 729 extends the codec list which is used for the SIP SDP provided that the Call Control feature doesn t alter the codec list The codec list excluding G 729 is in descending priority order G 711a G711u The codec list including G 729 is in descending priority order G 729ab G 711a G711u Depending on call direction and remote station especially the G 729 priority calls are negotiated with the following codecs Table codec negotiation T HPCIP SIP phone optiPoint Call initiator OpenStage G711 G 729 G 711 G 729 G 729 Call receiver G711 G729 G711 exclusive HPCIP G 7
314. verlap e If adding factory equipped Base stations running V1R1 to a V1R2 V1R3 or V1R4 HPCIP IWU they will not be scannable if the Dect network is different from 192 168 0 0 16 For details regarding these issues refer to chapter 6 2 1 Scanning of BSIP V1R1 with IWU V1R2 and newer Default gateway support In V1R1 the DECT network was statically configured to 192 168 0 0 16 192 168 0 0 255 255 0 0 If some components of the infrastructure PBX NTP Server Configuration PC e were located inside a network of 192 168 x y and e were located behind the default gateway the default route using a configured Default Gateway was without function since the IP stack of HPCIP IWU treated all 192 168 x y addresses as local due to the DECT network configuration As a workaround one single static route could be configured see Network desti nation Network mask Gateway at page Network Gateways 6 2 Adding new BSIP If version V1R2 V1R3 or V1R4 is running it is possible to configure a netmask for the DECT IP network In V1R1 the network address as well as the netmask was fixed 192 168 0 0 with a netmask of 255 255 0 0 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 245 Configuration Techniques Adding new BSIP 246 Now it is possible to configure the DECT IP network freely and assign it a netmask Due to routing issues this netmask may be changed to 255 255 255
315. ween the BSIP DHCP Enable available only in application mode BSIP IWU or Server IWU Activate this option if the BSIP VoIP Infrastructure network has to be configured by a DHCP server For DHCP details refer to Section 5 2 DHCP Important notes A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference Network Configuration IWU If using DHCP for the VoIP Infrastructure network the configuration of the DECT network additionally has to be accomplished manually since configuration of DECT IP addresses may not be distributed by the DHCP server After applying the DHCP changes reboot of IWU the IWU will be assigned a new IP address by the DHCP server Since there is no local console access at BSIP1 possible the only method to get the assigned IP address is to have access to the DHCP servers lease information Contact the administrator of the DHCP server before activating this option The last assigned IP addresses may be derived by the output of Network State which simultaneously initiates a new DHCP request e Alternatively a dedicated route to another network segment which is not reachable by the default gateway may be configured using the settings Network destination Network Mask and Gateway as described below Network Destination available only in application mode BSIP IWU or Server IWU Using this field the destination address for t
316. y mode appears A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 48 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify GmbH amp Co KG Mozilla Firefox Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe 192 1681 1 htmljwbm pro html session id 010907 5018ic 13971404913227ic 139714049 a El Googe p Re O Be HiPath Cordless IP Administration Unify G BsipOnly BsIpOnly Program Info Active System Version System Update System 1 Reboot Board Version System 2 Applic Mode IWLI Factory Setting Network State To change the application mode of the BSIP1 from BSIP Only to BSIP IWU select Applic Mode IWU Hints The current application mode is indicated at the bottom status line APPLICTYPE BSIPONLY or IWU The process of switching from BSIPONLY to IWU mode may take several minutes After changing the application mode the following message box will appear Switching to IWU mode and reboot Press OK to reboot the BSIP1 and start it in application mode BSIP IWU Important note After changing the application mode the BSIP1 will start in BSIP IWU mode and therefore has a different default IP address The default IP address in IWU mode is 192 168 2 1 The BSIP1 is accessible via the factory default IP address 192 168 2 1 in BSIP IWU mode To access the BSIP IWU WBM you
317. y the WBM A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 69 Configuration reference WBM overview IWU 70 4 1 3 2 Login and Password change Hint Password and Username are handled case sensitive The WBM configuration mode is chosen according the Login username Concurrent Logins are not possible The users who tries to login last is given the ability to logout the already logged in user see above 4 1 3 3 Changing a WBM User s password Important note Please note down the new password at a secure place Passwords are stored at system level and also used when updating the System at a later time If you forgot the password you only may overcome the situation by resetting the system to factory defaults On the Login page enter the Username and current password for the desti nated user which has to be changed Before clicking on Login activate the checkbox Change Password Two new fields will be displayed New password and Retype password Type in the new password in both fields Hint Username and passwords are case sensitive the minimum password length is 6 six characters Username UnifyAdmin Click on Change password and login If both new passwords are equal and valid you will be logged in onto the WBM Otherwise a error message will appear Hint A password change is applied to the active system partition Only after a System update the password changes
318. y the changes by clicking the Apply button at the bottom section e Configuration saved 5 Confirm the message box by clicking on OK As stated above for the changes to become active the BSIP has to be rebooted Important After rebooting the IWU will not be accessible by its IP address 192 168 2 1 anymore Instead it is accessible by the IP address of the IP VoIP Infrastructure Network configured at the step above If you have attached the IWU directly via an Ethernet cable you have to attach the IWU physically to the designated network segment after rebooting it 1 Select the configuration page Administration 2 Initiate the reboot by clicking on the left button which is labeled Active x The x is a placeholder for the active partition number in this example x 2 Start the reboot process by clicking on button Active 2 if the current active partition is System 2 as this example used see output of Active System If the active system of your BSIP is 1 then click the left button which is labeled Active 1 A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation 55 Quick Start Quick Start Small Solution Server Solution Wait about 2 minutes for the IWU BSIP or the Server to come up again In case of a BSIP IWU the board LEDs should change to permanently orange orange Access the WBM Web based management by the IP address you have configured before fo
319. ynchronization a chain based MGW synchronization topology or mixing both 2 12 2 2 Limitation of calls at 1588 master base For up to 60 BSIP1 as 1588 slave configured at one MGW no call limiting of the Base acting as 1588 master is necessary under normal circumstances In case of synchronization problems reducing the number of calls for the 1588 master is suggested If more than 60 BSIP1 are configured which are synchronized to the 1588 master the number of calls at the BSIP which serves as 1588 master should be reduced up to 0 In large deployments where several MGW s are synchronized via Inter MGW sync it is suggested to install those BSIP which sync between the MGW in a isolated environment e g the server room since there is constant temperature as well as a low number of handsets which may try to located at the basestation and therefore generate only low Dect load 2 12 2 3 Max no of BSIP per MGW For each MGW up to 120 modules are supported Besides the module type Bslp for a physical BSIP1 there are other module types see WBM gt Dect gt About gt Type which are required for Inter Media Gateway Synchronization These module types also reduce the maximum number of module resource per MGW 120 Each module of the following type also allocates one module resource CrossLinkSrv e CrossLinkCli Virt Base Therefore the number of max usable BSIP1 at a MGW depends on the specific configuration of the In
320. ystem DNS 2 In this field the IP address of the second secondary system global DNS server is configured This server is used by the system if the first primary DNS Server is unreachable This address may also be based on DHCP if it is a component part of DHCP Offer For details refer to Section 5 7 2 DNS Administration 4 5 4 Group Server This page holds the configuration for Group Server Group Servers are such servers which have to be assigned to a group to gain functionality in contrast to servers located on subpage Local Servers The following server types are configured on this subpage Server Type Remark Add DNS Gateway specific DNS servers mainly intended for SIP survivability usage It is assigned to a gateway at page WBM gt SIP gt Survivability LDAP The specific LDAP server is assigned to a group at page WBM gt Media Gateways gt Phonebooks Phonebook The phonebook is loaded to the IWU using the Import Server Config button It is assigned to a group at page WBM gt Media Gateways gt Phonebooks Hint Additionally a new server type Phonebook will be introduced which maintains the configuration of Media Gateway specific phonebooks see Section 5 18 System Phonebook A31003 C1010 M100 3 76A9 05 2014 HiPath Cordless IP Administrator Documentation Configuration reference SIP Configuration IWU 4 6 SIP Configuration IWU The configurat

HiPath Cordless IP - Experts Wiki

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents